76范文网
仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳
时间：2019-06-25 00:39:34 来源：76范文网

仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳 本文简介：

仁爱英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳仁爱英语七年级上册知识点归纳Unit1MakingNewFriends一、元音字母：Aa?Ee?Ii?Oo?Uu包含有以下元音的字母：[e?]?Aa?Hh?Jj?Kk??????[i:]?Ee?Bb?Cc?Dd?Gg?Pp?Tt?Vv??[a?]Ii?Yy??[j

仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳 本文内容：

仁爱英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳
仁爱英语七年级上册知识点归纳
Unit
1
Making
New
Friends
一、
元音字母：
Aa?Ee?Ii?Oo?Uu
包含有以下元音的字母：
[e?]
?Aa?
Hh
?Jj?
Kk??
???
?
[i:]
?Ee?
Bb
?Cc?Dd?
Gg?
Pp?Tt?
Vv??
[a?]
Ii
?Yy??
[ju:]
?Uu?
Qq?
Ww??

[e]?Ff
?Ll?
Mm
?Nn?
Ss
?Xx
?Zz
二、
大小写
句首字母，人名，地名，称呼语，专有名词，星期的首字母要大写，引人注意。
1.
Look！Is
that
Jane?
2.
He
comes
from
Hubei,
China.
3.
Mr.
Wang,
this
is
my
mom.
4.
What
class
are
you
in?
—I’m
in
Class
Ten,
Grade
Seven.
5.
On
Sunday,
we
go
to
the
West
Hill
for
a
picnic.
三、
问候语
1.
Good
morning/
afternoon/
evening.
2.
Hello!/
Hi!
---Hello!/
Hi!
3.
Nice/
Glad
to
see/
meet
you.
---Nice/
Glad
to
see/
meet
you,
too.
4.
Welcome
to
China/
my
home.
---Thanks.
5.
How
do
you
do?
---How
do
you
do?
6.
How
are
you?
---Fine,
thank
you.
And
you?
---I’m
OK.
7.
See
you
then/
later.
---See
you.
8.
Goodbye.
---Bye.
9.
Thank
you.
---You’re
welcome./
That’s
OK./
Not
at
all.
四、
数字句型
1.
How
old
are
you/
is
he/
are
they?
---I’m/
He
is/
They
are
eleven.
2.
What’s
your
telephone
number?
---It’s
4567967.
3.
What
class/
grade
are
you
in?
---
I’m
in
Class
Ten,
Grade
Seven.（注意大小写）
五、
重要句型及短语
1.
What’s
your
name?
---My
name
is
Sally.
2.
Where
are
you
from?
---I’m
from
China.
Where
do
you
come
from?
---I
come
from
China.
3.
Where
is
he/
she
from?
---He/She
is
from
Japan.

4.
What’s
this/
that
in
English?
---
It’s
a/
an……5.
What’re
these/
those
in
English?
---They’re……6.
How
do
you
spell
it?
---E-R-A-S-E-R,
eraser.
7.
Can
you
spell
it?
---Yes,
M-A-P,
map.
六、
Be动词的用法
?
我用am，你用are，is用于他、她、它，单数用is，复数就用are。
?
含be动词的陈述句变否定句在be后加not，变一般疑问句将be提前。
?
一般疑问句的肯定回答：Yes,人称代词+
be；否定回答：No,
人称代词+be
+
not。
如：They
are
teachers.----They
are
not
teachers.
----Are
they
teachers?

----Yes,
they
are./
No,
they
aren’t.
七、
(1)不定冠词a,
an的用法:
a
/an
都表示“一，一个”，a
用在以辅音音素开头的单词前,如：a
book;
a
desk;
an
用在以元音音素开头的单词前，如：an
apple
/
an
orange/
an
English
book;/
an
English
boy/
an
old
man;/an
actor/
an
English
teacher/
an
office
worker.
（2）the是定冠词，表特指，单复数前面都可用
?
We
are
in
the
same
class.
?
The
girl
in
a
pink
skirt
is
Jane.
?
Where
is
the
book?
?
This
isn’t
my
bike.
The
blue
one
is
mine.
(3)
and
的用法
?
数字相加看做单数：
Two
and
three
is
five.
?
颜色相加也是单数:

Black
and
white
is
gray.
?
人和事物相加是复数：Lucy
and
Lily
are
sisters.
The
pen
and
the
eraser
are
Jane’s
八、
名词单复数
1.
名词变复数规则
（1）规则变化
1）一般在名词词尾加--s，如：car----cars;
photo---photos;
toy---toys;
boy---boys
2）以s,
x,
ch,
sh结尾的词，在词尾加---es，如：box---boxes;
bus---buses
3）以辅音字母+y结尾，变y为i再加es，如：baby---babies;
family---families

4）以fe结尾，变fe为v再加es，如：knife---
knives

（2）不规则变化：
如：foot---feet;
man---men;
woman---women;
snowman---snowmen;

2.
集体名词：people,
clothes,
police,
family
3.
成双出现的名词：shoes,
pants(trousers),
gloves,
eyes,
ears
一词多义：An
orange
is
orange.重点词组：
1、Good
morning/
afternoon
/
evening???
早上/下午/晚上好

2、?glad
/
nice
to
meet
/
see
you??
见到你很高兴

glad
/
nice
to
meet
/
see
you,
too
3、?welcome
to
+
地点???
欢迎来到……

(回答：Thank
you
或者Thanks)
4、?this
is-----????
这是……
（用于介绍第三者的用语）
5、How
do
you
do
?你好

（回答也是：How
do
you
do
?
）
6、?How
are
you
??
你好吗？Fine,
thank
you
.And
you?????
很好；谢谢；你呢？????

I’m
OK
/
I’m
fine
,
too
.??
我也很好。
7、see
you
=
see
you
later
=
good-bye???????
再见
8、excuse
me?????????
打扰一下；请问
9、?I’m
……=
my
name
is
……??
我是……
10、?be
from
=
come
from?????
来自
11、in
English
用英语
12、Can
you
spell
it
???
Yes
/
No?
你能拼写它吗？??
能/不能
13、That’s
OK
/
That’s
all
right
/
You’re
welcome?/
Not
at
all???
不用谢
14、……
years
old?????????????????
……岁
15、telephone
number????
电话号码
QQ
number
QQ号码

ID
number
身份证
16、the
same
（相同的）
反义词是

different

（不同的）例:
We
are
in
the
same
grade,
but
we
are
in
different
classes.
?句型：
1.
What
is
your
name?你的名字是什么？
2.
Where
+be
+
主语
+
from?
某人来自于哪里？（回答：主语+be+地点）
Where
are
you
from?
I
am
from
Quan
Zhou.
3.?How
old
+
be
+
主语？???
某人几岁？
(回答：
主语
+
be
+
数字
)
例：
How
old
are
you
?
I’m
fourteen.
4.
What
is
your
telephone
number?

你的电话号码是多少?
（回答：My
telephone
number
is……或者It’s
……）
注意：读出号码的时候要逐个读出。
5.
What
class
/
grade
+be
+
主语
+
in
??????
某人在哪一个班级/年级？

?
例：What
class
are
you
in
?
I
am
in
Class
Five.
(注意：Class
和
Five需要大写）What
grade
are
you
in?
I
am
in
Grade
Seven.（注意：Grade
和
Seven需要大写）
6.??
What’s
this/
that
(in
English)
????
这是什么？

（回答：It’s
a/an
+
单数名词.

这是……）
?

What’re
these/
those
(in
English)?
这些是什么？
（回答：They’re
+
复数名词

这些是……）
7.?
How
do
you
spell
it????
你怎么拼写它？

E-R-A-S-E-R,
eraser.(注意拼读方法)Unit
2
Looking
Different
一、
重点句型
1.
Who
is
your
favorite
actor?
2.
We
are
in
the
same
school,
but
we
are
in
different
grades.
3.
What
do/does
+主语+look
like?
……长得怎么样？
What
does
he
look
like?
---
He
is
not
very
tall
but
very
strong.
---She
is
tall
and
has
short
brown
hair.
4.
We
don’t
look
the
same,
but
we
are
good
friends.We
look
the
same,
but
we
are
in
different
clothes.
5.
What
color
is/are
+主语？---It’s/
They’re
+颜色.What
color
is
her
hair?
---
It’s
blond.
6.
This
is
my
cap.
=
This
cap
is
mine.
Is
this
your
cap?
=
Is
this
cap
yours?
Whose
cap
is
this?
=
Whose
is
this
cap?
---
It’s
Sally’s.Whose
are
these
bananas?
---
They’re
their
bananas/
theirs.
7.
His
pants
are
blue
and
mine
are
white.(mine=my
pants)My
T-shirt
is
green
and
his
is
brown.(his=his
T-shirt)

8.
I
have
small
eyes,
but
he
has
big
ones.（ones指代eyes）
My
jacket
is
blue
and
white.
That
one
is
blue.
（one指代jacket）
二、
重点短语
1.
give
sb.
sth.
=
give
sth.
to
sb.
把某物给某人
Please
give
it
to
her.
2.
look
the
same
长相相同
look
different
长相不同，看起来不一样
3.
look
like看起来像
He
looks
like
his
father.
=
He
and
his
father
look
the
same.
4.
next
to
在……旁边
The
boy
next
to
me
is
my
good
friend.

5.
in
+颜色
穿着……颜色的衣服
in
+a/an
+颜色+衣服
穿着……颜色的……
The
boy
in
a
yellow
T-shirt
and
gray
pants
is
my
good
friend.
6.
(1)both两者都（Be动词之后，实义动词之前）
They
both
have
brown
hair
and
black
eyes.
They
are
both
office
workers.
(2)all
三者或三者以上都
They
are
all
kind
to
me.
7.
数字+(形状、大小)+颜色+n.
two
big
red
applesShe
has
short
blond
hair.
三、
动词原形和动词第三人称单数形式
（一）动词前是第三人称单数形式（he、she、it；单一的人；单一的名字；单一的事物）：动词要用单三形式。
实义动词变第三人称单数的规则：
1）一般情况直接加“s”，如：come----comes，meet----meets
2)
动词以o，s，sh，ch,
x结尾，加“es”，如：do---does;
go----goes;
teach---teaches;

3)
以辅音字母+y结尾，变y为i，再加es,
如:study---studies,
fly---flies,
try---tries
4）特殊情况：have----has
（二）句型转换：
1）当主语为第三人称单数：变否定句时，在动词前加doesn’t,
动词现原形；变一般疑问句时，在句首加does，动词现原形。
一般疑问句的肯定回答：Yes,
人称代词+does。
否定回答：No,
人称代词+doesn’t
如：
She
has
small
eyes.

---She
doesn’t
have
small
eyes.

---Does
she
have
small
eyes?
---Yes,
she
does.
/No,
she
doesn’t.
2)
当主语为除第三人称单数之外的人称:变否定句,在动词前加don’t;变一般疑问句,在句首加do,肯定回答:Yes,人称代词+do.否定回答:No,人称代词+don’t.

They
have
small
eyes.

---They
don’t
have
small
eyes.

---
Do
they
have
small
eyes?---Yes,
they
do.
/
No,
they
don’t.
四、
表示所属关系
1.
名词性物主代词=形容词性物主代词+名词

形容词性物主代词

myyour

his

herour

theirits

名词性物主代词mine

yours

his

hers

ours
theirs

its
?
--Whose
is
this
pen?
Is
it
yours?

?
--No,
it’s
not
mine.
My
pen
is
blue.
2.
名词所有格，用于人或其他表示有生命的名词后：
?
单数或不以s结尾的复数+’s，如：Jane’s
book
Women’s
Day
?
以s结尾的复数+’
如：
Teachers’
Day
?
Lucy’s
and
Lily’s
bags分有

Lucy
and
Lily’s
room共有
Those
are
Jane’s
shoes.=
Those
shoes
are
Jane’s.
3.
of
表示所属关系，用于没有生命的物体，如a
map
of
China
a
photo
of
my
family词组：
1、sb.
+
has/
have
(an
/a)
+
adj.
+
五官????=
sb.’s
五官
is
/
are
+
adj.
(描述长相)例：Lily
has
a
small
nose.
=
Lily’s
nose
is
small.2、?I
know
=
I
see?????
我明白了
3、That’s
right?????
那是对的
4、?look
the
same??=
?look
like
看起来相像
look
different??看起来不同
?
例：
Jim
and
Lilei
look
the
same.==
Jim
looks
like
Lilei.
.
5、look
at??+
N???
看某物

look
for
+N
寻找某人/某物
look
after
+N
照顾某人
6、both

两者都……

all
三者或者三者以上都……Both
和
all位于
be动词或情态动词后，位于行为动词前。例：
We
are
both
students.We
both
have
black
eyes.

We
can
both
speak
English.
7、?give
sth.
to
sb.
=
give
sb.
sth.???
把某物给某人；

(注意：如果sth.是it或them，只能用前者)
8、have
different
looks??=
look
different有着不同的长相
(看起来不相像)　
have
the
same
looks
=
look
the
same有着相同的长相
(看起来很相像)
9、over
there???
在那边
10、?in
+
颜色??????或
in
a/an/the
+颜色+衣服???
表示穿着……颜色的衣服

常常接在名词的后面，表示穿…颜色衣服的…

如
The
girl
in
red
is
my
sister.
=
The
girl
in
a
red
coat
is
my
sister.
11、??too
+
adj.????
太……
12、
pants
和
shoes
做主语,谓语动词用复数；
但a
pair
of
pants/
shoes
作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式

例：
His
shoes
are
black.
A
pair
of
shoes
is
under
the
bed.
13、
in
the
morning/
afternoon/
evening

在早上/下午/晚上at
night
在晚上
14、??go
shopping
=
do
some
shopping
去购物
类似的有
go
swimming

go
fishing

go
skating
等等
15、??help
sb.
(to)
do
sth
=
help
sb.
with
sth
帮助某人做某事
注意：sb.
用代词时必须用宾格
16、?
high
school
中学
17、
think
of
认为，想

think
about
=
think
of考虑，思考

I
think
+
从句:
我认为……
I
think
he
you
are
right.否定式常否定主句，但翻译时要否定后面的从句
例：I
don’t
think
he
can
come.
我认为他不会来了.(不能说：我不认为他会来)（否定转移）句型：
1、???????What
do/does
+
主语
+
look
like
????询问人的长相例：
What
does
your
English
teacher
look
like
?
你的英语老师长什么样？
2、?????
What’s
---and
---?????
……加……是什么？（回答：It’s
------）例：What’s
red
and
yellow?
It’s
orange.

What’s
two
and
five?
It’s
seven.
3、

Whose
+
东西
+
is
this/
that
?
　这/那是谁的…？
Whose
+
东西
+are
these/
those
?

这些/那些是谁的…？例：Whose
coat
is
this
?　
It
is
mine.
Whose
shoes
are
these?
They
are
hers.
4、

Who
is
the
letter
from?这封信来自于谁？It’s
from
Lily.
它来自于莉莉。
5、

What
color
be
+
东西？

(回答：It’s
+颜色或者
They’re
+
颜色)例：What
color
is
your
dress?

It’s
black.Unit
3
Getting
Together
一、
重点短语
1.
Could
you
please
+
动词原形……？用来表示委婉的请求
Could
you
please
tell
me
your
name?

---
Sure/
No
problem.
My
name
is
Sally.
---
Sorry.
2.
tell
sb.
sth.
=
tell
sth.
to
sb.
告诉某人某事3.
tell
sb.
about
sth.
告诉某人关于某事
Please
tell
me
your
name.
=
Please
tell
your
name
to
me.
Please
tell
Maria
about
it.
请把这件事告诉玛丽亚吧。
4.
help
sb.
do
sth.=
help
sb.
with
sth.
在某方面帮助某人，帮助某人做某事
Please
help
us
find
him.
Could
you
please
help
me
with
English?

注：would,
will,
could,
can,
may是情态动词，后面跟动词原形，无人称和时态的变换。
=
Could
you
please
help
me
study
English?
5.
want
to
do
sth.=
would
like
to
do
sth.
想要做某事
want
sth.
=
would
like
sth.
想要某物
want
sb.
to
do
sth.
想要某人做……
He
wants
to
visit
Beijing.
=
He
would
like
to
visit
Beijing.
I
want/would
like
an
orange.
Jane
wants
Kangkang
to
sing
some
songs
with
her.
6.
show
sth.
to
sb.=
show
sb.
sth.
把某物展示给某人看
Maria
shows
a
photo
of
her
family
to
Kangkang.
7.
My
English
is
very
good.
=I
can
speak
English
very
well.
8.
live
in+
地点

居住在某地
live
with
+
sb.

和某人住
He
live
in
China
with
his
parents.
9.
know
a
lot
about……
知道许多关于……的事
He
knows
a
lot
about
China.
10.
say表示说话的内容，speak表示说某种语言的能力
What
does
he
say
in
the
letter?
He
can
speak
some
English.
11.
对事物的喜欢程度
like……very
much/a
lot非常喜欢
like……a
little有点喜欢

don’t
like……at
all
一点都不喜欢
Many
students
in
our
class
like
English
a
lot,
but
I
like
it
a
little.
He
doesn’t
like
chocolate
at
all.
12.
a
lot=very
much放在句末，修饰动词，“非常，很”
例：I
like
the
boy
a
lot/
very
much.
a
lot
of或lots
of+可数名词复数/不可数名词
I
have
a
lot
of
English
books.
These
books
help
me
a
lot
with
my
English.
13.
every
day
每天

each
other
相互，彼此　
help
each
other
/
talk
to
each
other
14.
some
of
them他们中的一些
many
of
them他们中有很多
eat
out
下馆子，到外面吃饭
15.
play
with
sb.
和某人一块玩耍16.
like
to
do
与like
doing
sth.
喜欢(做)某事
辨析：

like
doing　　表示：长期喜欢，有爱好的意思
like
to
do
　表示：临时喜欢，常指某个具体的动作。可翻译成：想做某事
如：She
likes
swimming.她喜欢游泳。（经常性的爱好）
She
likes
to
swim
this
afternoon.她今天下午想游泳。（特指某一次的动作）
另外,在搭配(使用方法)上,还有一点区别
1.“
like
to
do
”一般与
“
would
”
搭配表示意愿。
例：I
would
like
to
swim
with
you
.
我愿意和你去游泳。Would
you
like
to
skate?
你愿意去滑冰吗？
2“
like
doing
”
表示爱好
例：I
like
watching
TV
.
我喜欢看电视。Do
you
like
singing?
你喜欢唱歌吗？
17.
Help
yourself/yourselves
to
sth.
随便吃(喝)……
18.
be
kind
to
sb.
对某人很友好
They
are
all
kind
to
me.
他们对我很友好。
It’s
very
kind
of
you.
你真好。
19.
be
glad
to
do
sth.
很高兴(乐意)做……
I
am
very
glad
to
be
here.
我很乐意在这里。
Glad
to
meet
you.
很高兴见到你。
20.
let
sb.
do
sth.
让某人做某事（let：使役动词）
Let
me
see.让我想一想。
Let
us
help
you
find
him.
让我们帮助你找到他。
21.
I
am
home.
我到家了。
Maria
isn’t
at
home/in
now.
玛丽亚现在不在家。
Welcome
to
my
home.
欢迎来我家。
It’s
time
to
go
home.
该回家了。
二、
重点句型
1.
实义动词变一般疑问句及其回答：
Does
he
speak
English?
---
Yes,
he
does./
No,
he
doesn’t.

Do
you
like
Chinese?
---
Yes,
I
like
it
very
much/
a
lot/
a
little.---
No,
I
don’t
like
it
at
all.
2.
询问职业及工作地点：
What
does
your
mother
do?(书面)

What
is
your
mother?(口语)---
She
is
an
English
teacher.
Where
does
she
work?
---
She
works/
teaches/studies
……
in
a
school
/
hospital
/
restauranton
a
farm

in
an
office3.
介绍家人
This
is
a
photo
of
my
family.
The
young
woman
in
red
is
my
mother.Is
the
young
woman
in
red
your
mother?(变一般疑问句)

Who
is
the
young
woman
in
red?(对划线部分提问)
My
grandparents,
my
cousin
and
I
are
on
the
sofa.
I
have
a
big
family.
我有一个大家庭。
I
love
my
family.
我爱我的家。
4.
有用的就餐表达语
1)
Would
you
like
something
to
drink
?
想不想喝些东西？
---Yes,
a
glass
of
apple
juice,
please.
/
No,
thanks.
something
to
drink
一些喝的东西something
to
eat一些吃的东西
2)
What
would
you
like
to
have
/
eat
/
drink
?
你想吃（喝）些什么？
---I’d
like
some
rice
and
chicken.
/
Let
me
see.
我想想看。
3)
Would
you
like
to
have
dinner
with
me?
想和我共进晚餐吗？
---Yes,
I’d
love
to.
/
Yes,
I’d
like
to.
----
I’m
sorry
I
have
to…
4)
What
do
you
usually
have
for
breakfast?
你通常早餐吃什么？---I
usually
have
milk
and
bread
for
breakfast.
have
…
for
breakfast/
lunch
/
dinner
早/午/晚餐吃……
5)
May
I
take
your
order
,sir
?

请问，要点菜了吗？
---Fish
with
vegetables
and
rice
,
please
.
6)
May
I
help
you
?
=
Can
I
help
you
?
=What
can
I
do
for
you
?
请问要吃/喝/买些什么？
5.
委婉地请求、提建议的五种表达
Would
you
like
sth.
/
to
do
…?
你愿意/想……？

What
/
How
about
sth.
/
doing
…?

……怎么样？
Why
not
do
…?
=
Why
don’t
you
do
…?
为什么不……？
Let’s
do
…!

让我们干……吧！
肯定回答:Yes,
I’d
like/love
to.
/Good
idea.
/OK.
/
All
right./
I’d
love
that./

Thanks,
that
would
be
very
nice.
否定回答:
No,
thanks.
/
I’m
sorry
I
can’t,
I
have
to
do…/

I’d
like
that,
but
I’m
sorry
I
have
no
time.
三、
人称代词的主格与宾格：
点拨：主格在句子中充当主语，放在动词之前；
宾格放在动词之后构成动宾短语，放在介词之后构成介宾短语。
主格
I
we
you
he
she
it
they
宾格
me
us
you
him
her
it
them
Do
you
know
them?
---
Yes.
They
are
my
new
classmates.
Do
they
go
home
with
us?
他们和我们一块回家吗？
四、
可数名词与不可数名词
1.
可数名词：可以用数目来计数的名词，有单数和复数之分。
如banana,
egg,
apple,
orange,
noodles,
vegetable,
hamburger
2.
不可数名词：不能用具体的数目来表示，前面不能加a/an,没有复数形式。
如milk,
chicken,
bread,
Coke,
coffee,
rice,
juice,
fish,
tea,
water,
chocolate
3.
不可数名词若要表示数量，可用：数词+量词+
of
+
不可数名词/可数名词复数。
如：a
glass
of
milk
一杯牛奶；
ten
bottles
of
apple
juice十瓶橙汁；a
pair
of
shoes/pants;
ten
loaves
of
bread
十条面包；
five
kilos
of
apples
五公斤苹果;

some/
a
lot
of
+可数名词的复数/
不可数名词
4
many
+可数名词的复数
much
+不可数名词
五、
书信的格式
1.
称呼：顶格写，常用Dear
…
开头，表示亲切、客套，后面用逗号。
2.
正文：从称呼的下一行开始写，开头空两格。
3.
结束语：正文下面的客套话，写在右下角，首字母大写，末尾用逗号，常用Yours。
4.
签名：指写信人的签名，写在结束语的下面。词组：
1.
Could
you
（please）……???????????（后接动词原形）
你愿意做某事吗？
May
I
……（后接动词原形）
我能做某事吗？
2.
What
does
he
say
in
the
letter?他在信里说了些什么？?
What
does
he
say
on
the
photo?

他在电话里说了些什么？
3.
do
sth
with
sb.???
和某人一起做某事?
（with　和）
4.
No
problem??????
没问题
5.
speak
+
语言???
说某种语言

speak
Englishspeak
Chinese

6.
the
Great
Wall
长城
7.
come/go
to
+
地点：去某地，但home
,
here,
there　这些是副词，前面不能加to
例：go
home
/
come
here
/
go
there
go
to
do
sth

去做某事

例：　They
go
to
play
basketball.
8.
like
doing
sth???????
喜欢做某事

?
like
to
do
sth
想要做某事
9.
help
sb.
with
sth?=
help
sb.
(to)
do
sth?????帮助某人某事
10.
at
home
在家be
home到家

in
one’s
home
在某人的家里
11.
have
a
seat
/
sit
down????????
请坐下
12.
office
worker???
办公室职员
cook
厨师

cooker炊具
13.
on
a
farm?????????
在农场上
on
the
sofa??????
在沙发上
14.
a
photo
of??one’s
family
????
某人的全家照
Family
Tree
家谱
(首字母都大写)
15.
in
a
hospital
在医院（纯属地点概念）

in
hospital
因病住院
例：He
is
ill
in
hospital.
他生病住院He
is
in
a
hospital.他在医院里
(不一定是因为生病来到医院)
16.
look
after
sb.
照顾某人
17.
teach
sb.
sth.
=
teach
sth
to
sb.教某人某东西
teach
sb.
to
do
sth
教某人做某事
18.
help
oneself
(
to
sth.
)???????
请随便（吃……）
Help
yourself/
yourselves
(to
fish)
19.
I’d
like
sth
=
I
would
like
sth.?????
我想要……
20.
Would
like
to
do
sth
=
want
to
do
sth?????
想要做某事
21.
Would
you
like
something
to
eat
(drink)?

你想要一些吃（喝）的东西吗？
to
eat
或
to
drink
修饰something，作为后置定语。
22.
Here
you
are?.???????给你
Here
we
are.
我们到了
23.
What
about
…=
How
about??…????????????
……怎么样？
后接代词或名词，还可以接动名词（即
What
about
doing
sth
）
24.
all?
right??????
好的
25.
a
cup
of
tea?
一杯茶
two
cups
of
tea
两杯茶
26.
milk
for
me???????
我要牛奶
27.
Why
not
……（后接动词原形）
=
Why
don’t
you
……?（后接动词原形）???为什么不做某事呢？
回答：Good
idea?????????
好主意；
28.
May
I
take
your
order
???
可以点菜了吗？
29.
wait
a
moment?
?=
just
a
moment??????????
等一下,请稍侯

wait
for
sb.
等待某人
30.
Can
I
help
you
?=
May
I
help
you?
=
What
can
I
do
for
you?
需要点什么帮忙吗？
31.
eat
out??
出去吃饭
32.
let
sb.
do
sth????
让某人做某事
33.
have
dinner/
breakfast
/lunch/supper???
吃正/早/午/晚
餐
34.
a
kind
of??
一种……

all
kinds
of?????????各种各样的……
35.
be
friendly
to
sb.
=
be
kind
to
sb.??
对某人友好36.
such
as????例如
例：I
like
fruits,
such
as
oranges,
bananas
and
apples
37.
be
glad
to
do
sth例：
I
am
glad
to
meet
you,
I
am
glad
to
be
here..Unit
4
Having
fun
一、
重点短语
1.
buy
sth.
for
sb.
=
buy
sb.
sth.
为某人买……
Linda
wants
to
buy
a
toy
car
for
her
cousin.
=
Linda
wants
to
buy
her
cousin
a
toy
car.
2.
try
on
sth.=
try
sth.
on试穿try
it/them
on(固定搭配)
Maria
tries
on
the
coat
in
a
clothes
shop.
3.
The
coat
looks
very
nice
on
you.
你穿上这件外套真漂亮。
4.
That’s
fine.
We’ll
take
it.
好的，我们就买它了。

5.
I
am
just
looking.
我只是随便看看。
6.
“Are
you
kidding?”
means
你在开玩笑吗
in
Chinese.
7.
think
想，认为

think
about
考虑
think
of
想法，认为
Kangkang
thinks
it’s
Li
Ming’s.

I’ll
think
about
it.
我要考虑一下。
think
about
a
plan
考虑一项计划
What
do
you
think
of
this
yellow
skirt?
8.
Thank
you
all
the
same.
仍然感谢你。
9.
get
some
wate
取水
fly
a
kite
/
kites
放风筝sing
some
songs
唱歌
get
up
起床meet
friends
at
home
在家和朋友见面
go
home
回家
have
a
picnic=go
(out)
for
a
picnic
去野餐
go
fishing
去钓鱼

go
shopping=do
some
shopping
购物
go
to
the
zoo去动物园

go
to
the
West
Hill
去西山visit
a
friend
拜访朋友
do
one’s
homework
做作业take
one’s
order点菜call
…
back
回电话

take
some
bread
带一些面包

see
the
Monkey
Show看猴子表演
10.
ask
sb.
to
do
sth.
请/要某人做某事
Could
you
ask
her
to
call
me
back
this
evening?
你能让她今晚给我回个电话吗？
11.
need
sth.
/to
do
sth.
需要(做)某事
We
need
to
help
them
with
their
English.
我们需要帮助他们学英语。
What
do
we
need?
---
We
need
two
kilos
of
apples
and
some
rice.
12.
have
/
has
to
do
sth.
不得不/必须做……
Kangkang
has
to
cook.康康必须要做饭。

Kangkang
doesn’t
have
to
cook.
(变否定句)
13.
save
节省，攒钱，挽救
Big
sale!
Buy
more
and
save
more!
大降价！买得多，省得多！
Ben
can
save
￥
5.
14.
here
这里

there
那里
Here
you
are.
给你。
Here
it
is.
在这。
Here
we
are.
我们到了。
The
clothes
are
there,
madam.
夫人，服装在那边。
no
=
not
any/a/an
He
has
no
books.
=He
doesn’t
have
any
books.
He
has
no
book.
=He
doesn’t
have
a
book.
Where
is
Baby
Monkey’s
home?
---
It’s
there.

15.
be
free
=
have
time
有时间，有空
Are
you
free
this
Sunday?

=
Do
you
have
(any)
time
this
Sunday?
I’m
sorry
I
have
no
time.

=
I’m
sorry
I
don’t
have
any
time.

16.
It’s
time
to
do
sth
/
for
sth.
该做某事了，是做某事的时候了
It’s
time
to
have
breakfast.
=
It’s
time
for
breakfast.
17.
Thank
you
for
your
help.
=
Thank
you
for
helping
me.
谢谢你的帮忙。
18.
this
Sunday/
morning
/
afternoon
/
eveningat
eight
o’clock
在八点整in
the
morning
/
afternoon
/
evening
on
Sunday
moring在星期天早上
19.

on
one’s
way
home在回家的路上
on
one’s
way
to
school
在上学的路上Buy
some
eggs
and
rice
on
your
way
home.The
Baby
Monkey
can’t
find
his
way
home.
二、
重点句型
1.
有用的购物表达语
1)
Can
I
help
you?
/
May
I
help
you?

---Yes,
please.
I
want
to
buy
some
clothes
for
my
daughter.
/
I
like
the
red
coat.---
I’m
just
looking,
thanks.
2)
What
can
I
do
for
you?
---I
want
a
T-shirt
for
my
son.
3)
Can
I
try
it
on?
/
Why
not
try
them
on?---
Sure
/
No
problem.
(Maria
tries
on
the
dress.)

4)
That’s
fine.
We’ll
take
it.
5)
280
yuan!
Are
you
kidding?
I’ll
think
about
it.
Thank
you
all
the
same.
6)
Could
you
help
me
do
some
shopping?
---
Sure.
What
do
we
need?
7)
Is
that
all?
---
Yes,
I
think
so.
就那些吗？—是的，我想就这些。
8)
It’s
too
heavy.
它太重了。

Let
me
help
you.
让我帮助你吧。
2.
询问对事物的观点、看法
How
do
you
like
this
pair
of
pants?
你认为这条裤子怎么样？What
do
you
think
of
the
pants?
---
They’re
too
long.
/
I
don’t
like
it
at
all.
How
about
the
blue
one?
3.
询问数量
how
much
+不可数名词
+
…？
how
many+复数名词(复数)
+…？
We
need
two
kilos
of
apples.

How
many
apples
do
you
need?
We
need
five
bags
of
rice.
How
many
bags
of
rice
do
you
need?
We
need
five
bags
of
rice.
How
much
rice
do
you
need?
4.
询问价格(price)
How
much
is
/
are
……？

---
It’s
/
They’re
…….
How
much
is
the
bread?
---
It’s
three
yuan
a
loaf.
How
much
are
the
shoes?
---
They
are
280
yuan.
5.
询问重量(quantity)
How
heavy
is
it?
---
It’s
one
kilo
a
bag.一千克一袋。
6.
打电话的简单交际用语:
1)
Who
is
this,
please?
---
This
is
Sally.

2)
May
I
speak
to
Maria?
---
Sorry,
she
isn’t
in/at
home
now.3)
Are
you
free
this
Sunday?
---
Yes.
What’s
up?
4)
Would
you
like
to
go
to
the
West
Hill
with
us?
Would
you
like
to
go
with
us?
5)
Could
you
ask
/
tell
him
to
call
me
back
this
evening?
---
Sure.
7.
委婉地请求、建议
1)
Would
you
like
to
fly
a
kite
with
me?
---
Oh/Yes,
I’d
love/like
to.

2)
How/What
about
flying
a
kite
with
me?---
I’m
sorry
I
can’t.
I
have
to
cook.
3)
Why
not
fly
a
kite
with
me?
---
I’d
like
that,
but
I’m
sorry
I
have
no
time.
4)
Let’s
fly
a
kite.
---
Good
idea.
/
OK.
/
That
would
be
very
nice.
8.
时间的表达方法：
1)
直接表达:“时+分”，如:
4:00
four
o’clock
;
12:05
twelve
o
five；2:30
two
thirty
2)
30分钟以内：用“分+
past+
时”，表示“几点几分”

如：8:15
a
quarter
past
eight;9:30
half
past
nine
3)
超过30分钟：用“(60-分)+
to+(时+1)”表示“差几分到几点”

如：3:55
five
to
four
;
5:40
twenty
to
six
9.
询问时间(time)
What
time
is
it,
please?
/
What
is
the
time,
please?
---
It’s
seven
o’clock.
10.
询问最喜欢的动物
What
are
your
favorite
animals?

---
Elephants/Monkeys/Panadas/Tigers.
They’re
so/very
kind/clever/cute/strong.
三、
some与any
的用法
some
用于肯定句及语气委婉的疑问句，any用于否定句和疑问句中。
She
wants
some
oranges.
Does
she
want
any
oranges?
What
about
/
Why
not
have/
Would
you
like
some
chicken?词组：
1、???????try?
on???
试穿……
try
on
the
dress
试穿这件连衣裙注意：如用代词，则放中间。如：try
it
on
,
try
them
on
2、???????we/I
will
take
it???
我们/我
买下了
（
这里的take
相当于buy）

3、???????buy
sth
for
sb.
=
buy
sb.
sth??????????????
给某人买某物；
4、????????I’m
just
looking????
我只是看看；
5、three
hundred
and
sixty-five

365
(百位数和十位数之间加and
,
十位数和个位数之间加”-“)
6、????????a
pair
of?????????
一对/一双……
7、????????running
shoes???
跑鞋
8、????????Are
you
kidding
????????????
你开玩笑吧；
9、??????
think
about?????
考虑；
10、????
thank
you
all
the
same?????
仍然谢谢你；
11、?????Is
that
all?
就这么多吗？

That’s
all.
就这么多吧
I2、

I
think
so.
我认为是这样的.
I
don’t
think
so.
我认为不是这样的.13、
当把东西给某人时可以说：
Here
you
are
或
Here
be
+
东西
或Here
it
is.
14、?????Don’t
worry.
别担心
worry
about
=
be
worried
about
　担心……

①
worry
about
+
宾语

如：Do
you
worry
about
your
lesson?
②
worried
烦恼的
be
worried
about
+宾语
如：She
is
worried
about
her
mother.
15.??????
a
few
+可数名词
??（肯定）；
一点，一些；few
+
可数名词：
（否定）
几乎没有
?
a
little
+不可数名词
（肯定）；
一点，一些；

little
+
+
不可数名词：
（否定）
几乎没有
16、???
be
free??=
have
time?????
有空的；反义词：be
busy
=
have
no
time
Are
you
free
tomorrow?
==
Do
you
have
time
tomorrow?
17、
在某一天使用介词on
,
在某个时刻用
at
如：On
Sunday
at
a
half
past
six

当this
接时间，不用介词，
this
Sunday
18、?????What’s
up
=
what’s
wrong
?
=
What’s
the
matter
什么事？
19、??????forget
to
do
sth.????
忘记去做某事（事还没做）
forget
doing
sth???
忘记曾做过某事（事已做完）
20、?????tell
sb.
about
sth.??????
告诉某人某事
tell
sb.
sth
=
tell
sth
to
sb.

把某事告诉某人
?

ask/tell
sb.
to
do
sth
叫某人做某事ask/tell
sb.
not
to
do
sth
叫某人不要做某事
21、??????电话用语：
①Who’s
this?

你是哪位？
②
Is
this
……你是……吗？
③This
is
……（speaking）
我是……④May
I
speak
to……我可以找……吗？
22、??????go
for
sth
=
go
to
do
sth
去做某事如：
go
for
class
=
go
to
have
class.
23、??????It’s
fun????
真是有趣的事
24、

call
sb.
=
give
sb.
a
call
打电话给某人

call
sb.
back????
给某人回电话
25、??????I’m
afraid?/sorry
(that)
?+
从句
恐怕……/
对不起，……
26、??????I
have
no
time???=
I
don’t
have
any
time
我没有时间
(
no
=
not
any
)
27、

be
not
in
=
be
not
at
home
=
be
out?????
出去了，不在家；
28、

sing
a
song??/
sing
some
songs?
唱歌；
???

fly
a
kite???
放风筝；
draw
picture
画画
play
sports
做运动；
watch
TV???看电视
read
books
看书
read
newspaper
看报纸
29、

let
sb.
do
sth
（后接动词原形）让某人做某事
30、

时间读法有顺读法和逆读法：
顺读法（eleven
thirty-six
表示11:36）
逆读法(分钟数小于等于30分
用
past
,
分钟数大于30分用to，如
five
past
ten
表示
10:05；
five
to
ten
表示
9：55，half
past
six
表示6：30
，
a
quarter
to
six
表示
5：45）31、
Show
sth
to
sb.
=
show
sb.
sth
把……拿给某人看；
作为名词表示
演出，表演

32、
祈使句的否定句，直接在句首加上Don"t
就可以了
33、???
have
to??…（后接动词原形）
不得不…（表客观）　must
必须（表主观）
48.?????????
It’s
time
for
sth/
doing
sth???

?It’s
time
to
do
sth???
该到做……的时候了？
It’s
time
for
sb.
to
do
sth?
是某人做某事的时候了
33、
next
time???下一次

next
week
下个星期the
next
day????
第二天；
34、
next
to…
=
near…
在……旁边

35、
get
up?????起床
go
to
bed??????上床睡觉；
get
sb.
up
叫某人起床
36、
do
one’s
homework?????做作业
37、
have
a
picnic?????
野餐

have
class
上课have
a
meeting
开会
have
a
party
举办聚会
have
dinner/
breakfast
/lunch/supper???
吃正/早/午/晚餐
have
+东西

吃/喝……have
a
good
time
=enjoy
oneself玩得很愉快
have
sb.
do
sth让某人做某事
（使役动词，后接动词原形）
其它两个使役动词：　make
sb.
do
sth
let
sb.
do
sth.
38、
??
on
the
weekday???????
在周末；
39、?????lot
of
=
lots
of
=
many
=much????????????
许多的，大量的
40、????
in
the
sun????????????
在阳光下；
41、???
sb.
like
---
best
=
sb.’s?
favorite
+
种类
is
/
are
……???

谁最喜欢……
42、??????on
one’s
way
to
----????
在某人去……的路上；on
one’s
way
home
在某人回家的路上
43、

Here
we
are.
我们到了
44、

It’s
very
kind
of
you
你真是太好了；
45、??????thanks
/
thank
you
for
+
n
/v-ing???????
为……而感谢你；
46、

?in
the
tree???
在树上（外物）

on
the
tree???
在树上（树本身长出的东西）
in
the
wall
在墙里
（如
window
）

on
the
wall
在墙上

句型：
1、?What
do
you
think
of
----??????
=
How
do
you
like
----
？??????
你认为……怎么样？
例：
What
do
you
think
of
your
English
teacher
?==
How
do
you
like
your
English
teacher????2、
How
much
be
+
主语？
(
回答：It’s
/
They’re
+
价钱.)How
much
is
your
English
book?问价格还可以用
what’s

the
price
of
……
3、??Why
not
……（后接动词原形）
=
Why
don’t
you
……?
（后接动词原形）???
为什么不做某事呢？
??
回答：Good
idea?????????
好主意；
4、
What
time
is
it
?
==
What
is
the
time?

(回答：It’s
+时间)
仁爱英语七年级下册知识点
Unit5
Topic1
一、短语总结
1.
在学校大门口

at
the
school
gate

2.
来学校
come
to
school
3.
去学校
go
to
school
4.
上课

have
class
/
have
classes
5.
步行

on
foot
=
walk
to

6.
骑自行车

ride
a
bike/
ride
bikes/
by
bike
/
on
a
bike
7.
坐公交
by
bus
/
take
a
bus
8.
坐地铁
by
subway
/
take
the
subway
/
on
the
subway
9.
坐飞机
by
plane/
take
the
plane
/
on
the
plane
10.
坐小汽车

by
car
/
in
a
car/
take
a
car/
drive
a
car
11.
坐轮船
by
ship

12.
坐小船
by
boat

13.
坐火车
by
train
/
on
the
train
14.
在我们组

in
our
group

15.
一群学生

a
group
of
students
16.
我们中的三个人
three
of
us
17.
在平日on
weekdays
18.
在周末on
the
weekends
/
at
weekends
19.
起床
get
up
20.
睡觉
go
to
bed
21.
早起
get
up
early
22.
回家
go
home
23.
到家

get
home
24.
去动物园

go
to
the
zoo
25.
去公园
go
to
the
park
26.
看电影see
a
movie
/
film
27.
看电视watch
TV
28.
在晚上in
the
evening
/
at
night
29.
帮助父母
help
parents
30.
做某人的家庭作业
do
one’s
(
my/
her/
his/
your/
their)homework
31.
在学校at
school
32.
知道,了解
know
about
/
learn
about
33.
校园生活
school
life
34.
一个美国学生
an
American
student
35.
在美国in
America
/
in
the
U.S.A.
36.
许多学生
many
students/
a
lot
of
students/
lots
of
students
37.
很少
very
few
38.
吃午饭have
lunch
39.
出去吃饭
eat
out
40.
在校期间
on
school
days
41.
休息一会
have
a
short
rest/
break
42.
午饭后

after
lunch
43.
在某人的业余时间in
one’s
free
time
=
in
one’s
spare
time
44.
打篮球
play
basketball

45.
踢足球
play
soccer
/
football
46.
弹钢琴
play
the
piano
47.
弹吉他
play
the
guitar
48.
拉二胡
play
erhu
49.
去游泳
go
swimming
/
go
for
a
swim
50.
去划船
go
boating

51.
球赛

a
ball
game
/
ball
games
52.
一年四次

four
times
a
year
53.
听音乐
listen
to
music
54.
读书

read
books
55.
看报

read
newspapers
56.
看医生
see
a
doctor
57.
去图书馆

go
to
the
library
58.
一周两次

twice
a
week
59.
见朋友
meet
friends
60.
每天

every
day
61.
在七点半

at
half
past
seven
62.
一小会
for
a
little
while
/
for
a
short
time
63.
晚饭后
after
supper
64.
吃饭

have
dinner
65.
吃早饭
have
breakfast
二、重要句型
1.
I
usually
come
to
school
by
subway.
同义句:
I
usually
take
the
subway
to
school.
对划线部分提问:
How
do
you
usually
come
to
school?
类似的有：
go
to
school
by
bike=go
to
school

on
a
bike=
ride
a
bike
to
school=ride
to
school
go
home
by
bus=go
home
on
a
bus=take
a
bus
home
2.
How
do
you
usually/
often…?你通常/经常怎样…?
3.
It’s
time
for
class.=It’s
time
to
have
class.
=It’s
time
for
having
class.
4.
What
about
you?
=How
about
you?
5.
How
often
…?
询问频率
，回答可以用频率副词：always,
usually,
often,
sometimes,
seldom,
never,
every
day
,every
+其他时间名词或表示频率的短语回答
表示频率的短语：次数+单位时间
e.g.
:
once
a
day
/
twice
a
week
/
three
times
a
month
6.
The
early
bird
catches
the
work.
(谚语)
笨鸟先飞
7.
Work
/
Study
must
come
first.
工作/
学习必须放在第一位！
8.
Classes
begin
at
eight.
=Class
begins
at
eight.

提问：
What
time
does
the
class
begin?
/
What
time
do
the
classes
begin?
三、重要单词的用法
1.
look
(感官动词)
看起来，后面加形容词
His
mother
looks
very
young.
They
look
very
cute.
Her
dress
looks
very
nice.
You
look
very
cool
in
this
coat.
2.
by
介词
by
后面直接加表示交通工具的名词，中间不用任何词修饰，如：by
bike
by
+动词ing形式，表示通过某种方式
People
show
love
to
their
mothers
by
giving
cards.
You
can
be
a
good
student
by
working
hard.
3.
over
(形容词)

School
is
over.
放学　　Class
is
over.
下课
4.
begin

现在分词:
beginning
过去式:
began
begin
to
do
sth
,
begin
doing
sth
He
begins
to
write
a
letter.
=He
begins
writing
a
letter.
如果begin本身为分词，只能用begin
to
do
sth
He
is
beginning
to
run.
5.
listen
to
听（动作）
，
hear
听见(结果)
6.
always
反义词
never
7.
本话题涉及的时态为一般现在时，句中常有频率副词或表示频率的短语，如果主语为三单，动词一定要用三单！Unit5
Topic2
(一)
重要单词：
1.
borrow:指主语借入
borrow
sth.
from
sb.

e.g
You
can
borrow
this
book
from
the
library.
May
I
borrow
your
eraser?
lend:
指主语借出
lend
sth.
to
sb.
/
lend
sb.
sth.
e.g
Can
you
lend
your
car
to
me?
They
often
lend
us
their
ball.
2.
keep
keep
和
borrow,
lend
的意思一样,都是表示借的意思,
区别是borrow和lend是瞬间动词,
而keep是延续性动词,表示借一段时间,
后常跟上一段时间

e.g
You
may
keep
this
book
for
two
weeks.
借进borrow
借出
lend
借多久
keep
3.
find和look
for
find
:找到,发现,强调结果

look
for寻找,强调过程
e.g
I’m
looking
for
my
shoes
everywhere,
but
I
can’t
find
it.
4.
return
return
:归还=give
backreturn
sth
to
sb=give
sth
back
to
sb
e.g
Please
return
this
book
to
Steve=please
give
back
this
book
to
Steve.
e.g
He
will
return
from
America
next
month.
5.
on
time:
准时,强调不早不迟到达
in
time:
及时,强调在规定的时间以前到达
e.g
We
must
go
to
work
on
time.

The
students
can
get
there
in
time.
6.
Japanese:
adj
日本的,日本人的,日语的
n.日本人,日语
当Japanese表示日本人时,是可数名词,单复数同形(与Chinese用法相同)

e.g
Two
Japanese
and
three
Chinese
are
swimming
in
the
swimming
pool.
7.
also
与too
两个都表是“也”的意思,
also用在句中,
too用在句末
e.g
Helen
is
also
a
student.
I
have
long
hair
and
she
has
long
hair,
too.
8.
plan
n.平面图

v.计划
plan
to
do
sth
(二)短语总结：
1.
on
time
准时
2.
in
time
及时3
.in
the
center
of:
在…..中央4
.next
to
在什么隔壁,在什么旁边
5.
at
the
back
of

在….后面(范围之内)

6.
behind在…..后面(范围之外)

7.
in
front
of….

在…..前面(外部后面)8.
in
the
front
of
在….前面(内部后面)
9
.on
the
left
在左边

10.
on
the
right

在右边
11.
show
sb
around领某人参观
12.
between
…and…
在….与….之间
13.
from
….to…

从…..到…..
14.
on
the
shelf
在架子上
shelf复数形式是shelves
15.
do
better
in
sth/doing
sth在……方面做的更好
do
well
in
sth/doing
sth
在…..做得好
be
good
at
sth/doing
sth
在…..方面擅长
16.
at
the
moment现在,此刻
17.
play
computer
games
玩电脑游戏
18.
a
few
几个
19.
the
Great
Wall
长城
(三)重要句型总结
1.
What’s
in+sth
表示哪里有什么东西
e.g
What’s
in
your
purse?
钱包里有什么东西?
What
else
还有别的什么么?
else:
别的,其它的
What
else
do
you
have?
Who
else还有别的什么人么?

Where
else
还有别的什么地方么?
else除了可以放在疑问词what,who,
where等后面，还可以放在something,
anything,
nothing,
somebody,
anybody,
nobody后面
e.g
I
don’t
have
anything
else
to
do.
I
can’t
see
anybody
else
in
the
room.
2.
Here
are
some
photos
of
his.
名词＋Of+名词性物主代词/名词所有格----------双重所有格
e.g
a
friend
of
Sam’s
萨姆的一个朋友
a
friend
of
mine
我的一个朋友
3.
love
doing
sth习惯性的爱好和习惯
love
to
do
sth一次性的动作或目前想做的事
e.g
She
loves
reading
in
bed.
I
love
to
go
swimming
today.
（四）语法：现在进行时
(1)
.
现在进行时表示正在发生或进行的动作,可与now,
at
the
moment等时间状语连用
e.g
I’m
reading
a
book
now.
(2).
现在进行时表示当前一段时间内一直进行的动作
e.g
They’re
working
on
a
farm
this
week.
(3).
某些行为动词的现在进行时形式可以表示将来,常常有意图,安排或打算的含义,并且可与表将来的时间状语连用,到目前我们所学的这类动词有come,go,fly,return
e.g
They
are
flying
to
London
this
afternoon.
We
are
going
to
Hong
Kong
tomorrow.
Steve
is
coming
tomorrow
evening.
(4)现在进行时的构成:
现在进行时主要由be+doing构成
肯定句:主语+be+doing+sth
否定句:主语+be+not+doing+sth
一般疑问句:Be+主语+doing+sth
回答:Yes,主(代)+be
/No,主(代)+be+not
特殊疑问句:
What+be+主语+doing?
一般在动词末尾加-ing
buy-----buying
call----calling
drink----drinking

以不发音字母e结尾的单词,去e
加-ing
come----coming
drive----driving
give-----giving
末尾只有一个辅音字母,且这个辅音字母前面不是字母组合的词,要
双写末尾辅音字母,再加-ing
plan----planning

swim----swimming
stop---stopping
sit---sitting
以ie结尾的词,变ie为y,再加-ing
die----dying

lie----lying

(5).
现在分词的构成：Unit
5
Topic
3
（一）重点单词
Today,
Wednesday,
Monday,
Tuesday,
geogrophy,
Thursday,
Friday,
art,
history,
math,
science,
meeting,
activity,
lesson,
draw,
learn,
interesting,
difficult,
boring
,which,
subject,
best,
other,
friendly,
February,
newspaper,
hard,
wish,
story.

（二）重点短语
1.Have
a
music
class.上音乐课
2.at
ten
o’clock
在十点钟
3.be
over
(=finish)
结束
4.on+星期名词
在星期几
5.outdoor
activities
户外活动
6.work
on
致力于，专心于
7.
learn
about
the
past
了解历史
8.it’s
time
for
…
该干…了
9.be
friendly
to
对…友好
10.
play
with
sb
和某人玩耍Play
with
sth玩弄某物
11.swim
in
the
swimming
pool
在游泳池游泳
12.draw
pictures
画画
14.
every
Tuesday
and
Thursday
每周二和周四
15.tell
sb
sth=tell
sth
to
sb
把某事告诉某人
16.
school?newspaper
校报
17.and
so
on
等等
18.
learn
sth
from
从…学到…
19.
hard
work
辛勤工作
20.
thank
sb
for
sth/
thank
sb.
for
doing
sth
因某事而感谢某人
21.
run
on
the
playground
在操场跑步
22.
watch
animals看动物
23.
play
soccer
at
school
在学校踢足球
24.
read
a
book
at
home
在家看书
25.have
dinner
in
the
school
dinning
hall
在学校餐厅吃饭
（三）重点句型

1.
What
day
is
it
today?

It’s
Wednesday.
What
day
…?常用来表示对星期几的提问。

注意：What’s
the
date…?
是对日期的提问。

2.
What
class
are
they
having?
---They
are
having
a
music
class.

What
class
用来询问“什么课程”,
class与lesson同义。
3.
What
time
does
the
class
begin?
什么时间开始上课？
--At
ten
o’clock.

begin“开始”同义词是start
反义词是finish或end.
4.
How
many
lessons
does
he
have
every
weekday?
他每天上几节课？
5.
You
must
like
English
very
much.你一定非常喜欢英语。
must在这里表示肯定推测。
6.
--What
do
you
think
of
it?
--Sometimes
it’s
difficult
and
boring,
so
I
don’t
like
it
very
much.
What
do
you
think
of…?
相当于How
do
you
like
…?
意思是“你认为怎么样？”询问对方对某事或者某人的看法。
7.
What’s
your
favorite
subject?你最喜欢的科目是什么？
What
one’s
favorite…?
=
What
does
sb.
like
best?
某人最喜欢什么？
8.
--Why
do
you
like
it?
你为什么喜欢它？
--Because
it’s
easy
and
interesting.因为它简单而有趣。回答Why…?用Because…如果表示你为什么不用
Why
not…?
或Why
don’t
you…?
9.
My
teachers
are
very
friendly
to
me.

be
friendly
to
sb.意思是“对某人很友好”
注意：
friendly是形容词
“友好的”“友善的”，而不是副词。
10.
It’s
time
for
class.
Let’s
go.哦，上课的时间到了，我们走吧！It’s
time
for
sth=
it’s
time
to
do
sth.
该做某事了
英语书信格式请参考课本P107页的介绍，掌握英文书信的格式。
Unit
6
Topic
1
（一）重点短语：
1.
on
the
second
floor
在第二层

（
The
building
has
four
floors.
I
am
on
the
first
floor.）
2.
go
upstairs（
adv.）上楼；
go
downstairs
下楼

3.
a
moment
later
过了一会儿4.
play
with
sb
和某人一起玩

play
with
sth.
玩弄某物
5.
in
front
of
和in
the
front
of
区别：加the的词组表示物体内部的前面
6.
on
the
wall
在墙上
in
the
wall
7.
on
the
tree
（苹果）
in
the
tree
（鸟）8.
a
model
plane
模型飞机9.
play
on
the
computer
玩电脑
（比较play
computer
games
玩电脑游戏）
（二）重点句型：
1.
There
be
句型
（翻译出来是“在某地有某物”，表示一种客观存在，
而have表主观拥有，其主语是人。结构
There
be
+
主语+介词短语，
注意就近原则）
肯定句：There
is
a
computer
in
your
study.

否定句：
There
isn’t
a
computer
in
your
study.
一般疑问句：
Is
there
a
computer
in
your
study?Yes,
there
is./
No,
there
isn’t.
特殊疑问句：What’s
in
your
study?

★问数量：How
many
computers
are
there
in
your
study?

【注】There
is
some
milk
on
the
table.
（此处虽然是some
milk,
但是由于是不可数名词，be动词还是用is）
变为否定句：There
isn’t
any
milk
on
the
table.
★就近原则：
There
is
a
lamp
,
a
computer,
some
books
and
so
on.
有一盏灯、一台电脑和一些书等等。
2.
Welcome
to
my
new
home.【
home作n.】

(对比Welcome
home
【
home
作adv.】
)
3.
There
are
so
many
books
on
the
shelf.
书架上有这么多好看的书啊。
4.
Why
not
go
upstairs
and
have
a
look?
=
Why
don’t
you…….？
为什么不上楼看一看呢？
5.My
dog
is
playing
with
my
computer.
我的狗在玩我的电脑呢。
6.Don’t
put
them
here.
Put
them
away.别把它们放在这儿，请收起来放好。
7.
You
must
look
after
your
things.你必须保管好你的东西。
8.How
many
pairs
of
shoes
are
there
under
the
bed?
在床下有多少双鞋子？
9.
There
are
many
beautiful
flowers
in
the
garden,
but
there
aren’t
any
trees
in
it.

花园里有许多漂亮的花，但是却没有树。
10.
I
love
playing
on
the
computer
in
the
study.
我喜欢在书房玩电脑。
（love
doing
sth.=like
doing
sth.
喜欢做某事）
（三）重点[介词]用法
年、月、午（别），季（节）in加上，
某日午别当用on；
钟点时（刻）、日（期）用at,
一周七天均用on.
（四）重点易错题：Unit
6Topic
2
（一）重点短语
1.
在农村
in
the
country
在郊区
in
the
suburb

2.一套三居室的房子
house
with
three
bedrooms3.
call
sb.
at
+电话号码
,拨打….与某人联系
4.
a
quiet
double
room
under
300yuan
per
month
一间安静的双人间，月租低于300元
per=every，后加名词单数
5.house
with
furniture
for
a
family
of
three
适合三口之家，家具齐全的房子
6.
rent
sth.
to
sb.
把某物租给某人

rent
sth.
from
sb.
从某人那租某物

7.
on
the
street
corner
在街角8.
keep
money
存钱9.
寄信
mail
(post)
letter
10.
see
a
doctor
看医生
11.
month
的复数
months
12
at
the
end
of
在…..的尽头
13
community
service
center
in
our
area
在我们这带的服务中心
14.
靠近
be
close
(adj.)
to
/
close
(adv.)
to
/
near
/
next
to
(紧靠)【反义词是
far
from】
15.
right
now
马上，立刻=
at
once

16.
Children’s
Day
儿童节
；
Teachers’
Day
教师节
；Women’s
Day
妇女节
（二）重点句型：
1.--What’s
your
home
like?
你的家是什么样的？
what
be
+…..like?
询问某人某物情况或者状况的句型。What
do(does)
……look
like？专门问外貌。
--It’s
an
apartment
building.
它是一栋公寓楼。
2.
They
live
in
a
big
farmhouse
in
the
country.
他们住在农村的农舍里。
3.
What’s
the
matter
with….?=
What’s
up
with……?=
What’s
wrong
with…..?

……有什么事？
4.
I
hear
you
playing
the
piano我听到你正在弹钢琴
（hear
sb.
do
sth.
表示听到某人做过了某事，类似的有see,watch,find）
5.
--I
‘m
afraid
it’s
too
loud.--恐怕声音有点大。
--I’
m
really
sorry
about
that.
--我真的对此很抱歉。
6.
There
are
no
houses
on
the
right.
=
There
aren’t
any
houses….
（no后可以加可数和不可数名词=
not
any后加不可数名词或者可数名词复数
/
not
a
后加可数名词单数）
7.
There
are
a
lot
of
tall
buildings
and
small
gardens
in
our
community.

在我们的社区里有许多高楼和小花园。
a
lot
of=many
,much,还等于lots
of；一般用于肯定句。
8.
There
are
many
shops
and
restaurants
close
to
my
home.
=
My
home
is
close
to
my
shops.我家附近有许多商店和饭店。
9.
The
parking
lot
and
the
train
station
are
not
far
from
here.

停车场和火车站离这不远。（near/close
to
反义词far
from）
10.
We
can
call
it
for
help.
(call
sb
for
sth/
doing
sth.)

我们可以打电话向它求救。
11.
Are
there
many
people
living
near
your
home?
有许多人住在你家附近吗？
（there
be
+sb.+doing
sth表示某地有某人在做什么）
12.
I
can’t
hear
you,
the
line
is
bad.
我听不清，线路不好。
13.
My
kitchen
fan
doesn"t
work.

=
There
is
something
wrong
with
my
kitchen
fan.

=
Something
is
wrong
with
my
kitchen
fan.
我家厨房的排气扇坏了。
14.
I’ll
get
someone
to
check
it
right
now.我会马上派人去检查一下它的。
(get
sb
to
do
sth.
派某人去做某事
=
ask
sb
to
do
sth.）
15.
Many
people
are
moving
from
cities
to
the
suburbs.

许多人正从城市搬迁到郊区。
（move
to
….,
move
from
….to
….从…..搬到、移动到…..）
16.
The
traffic
is
heavy
and
the
cost
of
living
is
high.
交通拥挤，生活开销高。
（cost
在这做名词，做动词时，主语是物，句型
sth.
cost
sb
some
money
）

e.g.
The
rose
costs
me
10
yuan.

注：traffic
不可数名词，be动词用单数，交通量的大小用heavy/busy和little/
a
little
修饰。
17.
There
are
many
houses
with
big
yards
in
the
suburbs.
郊区有许多带着大院子的房子。
18.
What
kind
of
home
do
you
live
in?
你住在什么样的房子里？Unit
6Topic
3
（一）重点短语
1.
turn
left
at
the
first
street
在第二个街口向左转

=
take
the
second
street(turning)
on
the
left

2.
go
across
(prep.)
the
bridge
=
cross
(v.)the
bridge
过桥

3.
across
from
在….的对面
4.
on
the
road
在路上
on/
in
the
street
在街上
5.
on
the
corner
of
the
street
在街角

（比较in
the
corner
of
和at
the
corner
of）

6.
between….and
….在…和….之间
7.
walk
on
继续走8
public
phone
公用电话9.
at
the
traffic
lights
在红绿灯处10.
No
right
turn
禁止右转
No
parking
禁止停车

Go
straight
直走
11.
be
in
danger
处于危险之中
12.
get
hurt
受伤（get
系动词，hurt
是形容词）

13.
lose
one’s
life
失去了某人的生命
14.
obey
the
traffic
rules
遵守交通规则15.
a
ticket
for
speeding/
drinking
and
driving/parking
in
the
wrong
place
/
making
a
wrong
turn
超速/酒后驾车/乱停车/转错弯罚单

16.
make
a
wrong
turn
转错弯
17.
keep
quiet
in
class.
上课时要安静。
（二）重点句型
1.--Excuse
me,
is
there
a
bank
near
here?

--
Go
up
（Go
along）this
street
to
the
end
,and
you
will
find
it
on
your
left.
--打扰了，请问附近有银行吗？
--沿着这条街一直走到尽头，你就会发下银行在你左边。
2.
How
can
I
get
to
the
bookstore?
=
Could
you
tell
me
the
way
to
the
bookstore?
=
Could
you
tell
me
how
to
get
to
the
bookstore?

=
Where
is
the
way
to
the
bookstore?
问路的句型
3.
It"s
about
five
hundred
meters
along
（adv.）
on
the
right.

顺着右边走大约500米就到了。
4.
Go
along
this
road
until
you
get
to
Beisihuan
Road.
沿着这条路一直走，直到你到达北四环路。（特指某个道路前面不加the，
大写这条路的名字）
5.
You
can’t
miss
it.
你不会错过它的。（miss
除了表示错过，还可以表示“想念”e.g.
She
misses
her
mother.
）
6.
You
need
to
take
bus
No.
718,
then
you
should
change
to
the
No.
108
bus
at
Anzhen
Bridge.
你需要乘坐718路车，然后你应该在安贞桥换乘108路车。
【注意：】（1）need
to
do
sth,
需要去做某事
;
need
sth
/
sb
需要某物，某人（2）should
在这是情态动词，后加动原。
（3）change
to
转乘。
change
from
A
to
B
从A变成B（change
作名词还可以表示“零钱”，不可数）
（4）几路车有两种表示方法：
bus
NO.718
或者the
NO.718
bus
7.
--How
far
is
it
from
here?
(问距离)
--It’s
about
ten
kilometers
away
from
here.

离这有多远？离这有十千米远。
8.
How
can
we
make
the
roads
safe?
我们怎样才能使道路安全？（make
sth/
sb.
+adj.）
9．Before（prep.）
we
cross
the
road,
we
must
stop
and
look
both
ways.

在我们过马路之前，我们必须停下来向路的两边看。
10.
We
must
never
play
on
the
street.
我们绝对不能在街上玩耍。
=
We
must
not
play
the
street.
11.
It’s
good
to
help
children
and
old
people
to
cross
the
road.

帮助小孩和老人过马路是一种助人为乐的行为。（It’s
good
to
do
sth.）
12.Wait
for
your
turn
when
the
lights
are
red.

在红灯亮之前请等待。Unit7
Topic
1
（一）核心词汇：
birthday,
May,
celebrate,
party,
fourth,
fifth,
sixth,
seventh,
eighth,
ninth,
tenth,
twelfth,
twentieth,
date,
January,
March,
April,
June,
July,
August,
September,
October,
November,
December,
alone,
were,
born,
was,
thousand,
present,
shape,
hill,
square,
circle,
ago,
machine,
football,
special,
candle,
surprise.
（二）常用词组：
1.
plan
to
do
sth.
计划做某事
2.
be
born
出生3.
have
a
look
看一看
4.
just
now
刚才

5.
use
sth.
for
/
to…
用某物作……用6.
do
some
cleaning
做扫除
（三）重点句型：
1.
How
do
you
plan
to
celebrate
it?你打算如何庆祝？
2.
----When
were
you
born?你什么时候出生？
----I
was
born
in
June,
1970.
我生于1970年6月。
3.
----Were
you
born
in
Hebei?
你出生于河北吗？
----Yes,
I
was.
是的，我是。
4.
When
was
your
daughter
born?

你的女儿什么时候出生？
5.
--Was
she
born
in
Hebei,
too?她也生于河北吗？
--No,
she
wasn’t.
不，她不是。
6.
--Where
was
she
born?她出生于哪里？
--She
was
born
in
Henan.
她出生于河南。
7.
--What’s
the
shape
of
your
present?
你的礼物的形状是什么？
--It’s
round.
它是圆形的。
8.
--What
shape
is
it?
它是什么形状？
--It’s
a
rectangle.它是长方形的。
9.
--What
do
we
use
it
for?我们用它来做什么？
--We
used
it
to
study
English.
我们用它来学习英语。
10.
--How
long
/
wide
is
it?
它多长/
宽？
--It’s
60
centimeters
long/wide.它60厘米长/宽。
(四)交际用语：
1.
--Would
you
like
to
come?

你想要来吗？
--Yes,
I’d
love
to.
是的，我想要来。
2.
--What
day
is
it?

今天星期几？
--It’s
Thursday.星期四。
3.
--What’s
the
date
today?

今天几号？
--It’s
May
8th.5月8号。
4.
--Can
I
have
a
look(at
sth)?
我可以看一下(…)吗？
--Sorry,
I’m
afraid
you
can’t.
对不起，恐怕你不能。
（五）语法精粹：
1.
一般过去时（I）
一般过去时表示过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态，常与
a
minute
ago,
yesterday,
last
year,
in
those
days,
just
now,
in
1990等表示过去的时间状语连用；一般过去时也表示过去经常或反复发生的动作。
如：I
got
up
at
6:30
yesterday.
昨天我6点30分起床。
My
father
was
at
work
yesterday
afternoon.
昨天下午我父亲在上班。
He
always
went
to
work
by
bus
last
year.
去年他总是乘公共汽车上班。

2.
基数词和序数词的用法
1，2，3，特殊记，th四加起
8后面减去t,
nine后面不要e
ve
要用f替，ty变成tie
几十，几百几，只变个位记心里Unit
7Topic
2

(一).
重点短语1.
在晚会上
at
the
party在康康的生日晚会
at
Kangkang’s
birthday
party2.
弹钢琴
play
the
piano踢足球
play
soccer

打球类比赛
play
ball
games3.
唱汉语/英文歌曲
sing
Chinese/English
songs唱一首英文歌曲
sing
an
English
song4.
跳迪斯科
dance
the
disco

跳/表演芭蕾舞
perform
ballet
5.
玩儿得高兴
have
a
good
time
=
enjoy
oneself6.
把这些花拿到晚会上去take
these
flowers
to
the
party

把那些花拿到晚会上来
bring
those
flowers
to
the
partybring/take
…to
…
(有方向、远近之分)7.
如此多的人

so
many
people
(people集体名词，单复数同形)

如此多的水/牛奶/果汁
so
much
water/milk/juice

一些人/水/学生some
people/water/students
8.
爬树/山climb
trees/
hills9.
照相
take
photos/
pictures

给某人照相
take
photos/pictures
of/for
sb.

10.
画画
draw
pictures

11.
讲、说日语speak
Japanese

用日语说这个单词

say
the
word
in
Japanese

12.
做飞机模型
make
model
planes
13.
户外活动

outdoor
activities
室内活动

indoor
activities
14.
一年前
one
year
ago
四年前
four
years
ago

15.
擅长做某事
be
good
at
+n./
pron./doing
在某方面做得好
do
well
in
+n./
pron./doing
在某方面做得更好

do
better
in
+n./
pron./doing

16.
在…岁时

at
the
age
of…

17.
在某人的帮助下
with
someone’s
help
＝
with
the
help
of
someone

18.
开始做某事
begin
to
do
sth.
=
start
to
do
sth.

19.
对……困难
be
hard
for…

20．想要做某事
would
like
to
do
sth.
/
want
to
do
sth.

（二）重点句子总结

1.
–Can
you
count
the
photos
for
me?
你能为我数数这些照片吗？
--Yes,
I
can.
/
No,
I
can’t.
好的，可以。/
不，不可以。
2.
–Do
you
want
to
sing
Chinese
songs
or
English
songs?

你想唱中文歌还是英文歌？--Chinese
songs.

中文歌。
3.
–Can
you
dance
the
disco
or
perform
ballet?
你会跳迪斯科还是跳芭蕾舞？--I
can
dance
the
disco.
我会跳迪斯科。
4.
–What
else
can
you
do?
你还能做其他什么吗？（else为形容词，做后置定语。一般放在不定代词和疑问词之后）--I
can
dance
and
play
the
guitar.
我会跳舞和弹吉他。
5.
I
can
only/also
sing
English
songs.
我只/
也会唱英文歌。
（only/also一般放在be动词、情态动词之后，实义动词之前）
6.
I
can
swim
a
little
/
very
well.（修饰动词不能用very
good）我会一点游泳。/
我游泳游得很好I
can’t
swim
at
all.
我根本不会游泳。
7.
I’m
sure
we’ll
have
a
good
time
at
the
party.我确信我们在晚会上一定会过得很愉快。
(be
sure
of…
/
be
sure
to
do.
be
sure
(that)+句子

8.
–Happy
birthday
to
you!
生日快乐！Best
wishes
to
you!
衷心祝福你！
--Thank
you(very
much)
/
Thanks
(a
lot).
（非常）谢谢！

9.
When
she
was
five,
she
could
only
dance
a
little.
当她五岁时，她会跳一点儿舞。(when在这里是连词，后跟句子。也可做疑问词，引导提问日期的特殊疑问句)

10.
One
year
ago,
she
couldn’t
do
it
at
all.
一年前她根本不会做这件事。

11.
They
could
do
it
before,
but
not
very
well.

他们一年前会做这件事，但是做得不是很好。

12.
Zhang
Jun
can
ride
a
bike
this
year,
but
he
couldn’t
do
it
a
year
ago.
张军今年会骑自行车，但是他一年前并不会。

13.
Michael
can’t
come
to
school
today
because
he
hurt
his
right
leg.
Michael今天不能来上学了，因为他伤到了他的右腿。

14.
I
couldn’t
play
the
piano
when
I
was
four
and
I
still
can’t
now.
我四岁时不会弹钢琴而且我现在仍然不会。

15.
Kangkang
is
good
at
playing
soccer,
while
Michael
does
well
in
basketball.
康康擅长踢足球，而Micheal篮球打得好。（表示对比）

16.
Six
years
ago,
there
was
something
wrong
with
her
eyes.（there
be
过去时）
六年前，她的眼睛出了毛病。

17.
She
couldn’t
see
anything.
=
She
could
see
nothing.
她什么都看不见了。

18.
Life
was
very
hard
for
her
when
she
was
young.
当她年轻的时候，生活对她来讲是艰难的。

19.
In
English,
“hard”
means
“difficult”
here.
英语中，“hard”的意思是困难的。

20.
No
way!
没门！绝对不行！
(三)重要语法总结
情态动词can
/
could
的用法1.
情态动词本身有各种意义，但不能单独做谓语，只能和动词一起构成谓语，表示说话人的语气和情感。没有人称和数的变化。2.
can/could
表示一般的能力，could表示过去的能力，can
表示现在或将来的能力。3.
当表示允许别人某事时，用can而不用could.4.
表示提议和请求。在语气上could较客气，但can较肯定。
e.g.
A
monkey
can’t
swim.
She
couldn’t
draw
before.
--Could
I
open
the
door
now?
--Yes,
of
course
you
can.
Could
you
tell
me
the
way
to
the
hospital?
Unit7
Topic3
（一）重点短语
1.
at
Kangkang’s
birthday
party.在康康的生日晚会上
2.
recite
a
Chinese
poem背一首中文诗
3.
perform
magic
tricks表演魔术
4.
enjoy
oneselfhave
a
good
time玩的很高兴
5.
dance
the
disco跳迪斯科
6.
perform
kung
fu
/ballet表演功夫
/
跳芭蕾舞
7.
one
of
Kangkang’s
friends康康的一个朋友
8.
miss
the
chair没抢着椅子
9.
fall
down倒下
10.
hurt
oneself伤着自己
11.
at
once
//
right
now
//
right
away立刻，马上
12.
happen
to
sb./sth.发生在某人/某物身上
13.
stand
up站起来
//
sit
down
坐下
14.
come
back
to
/return
to…回来
15.
at
that
time在那时
16.
play
video
games玩电子游戏
17.
go
to
the
movies去看电影
see
a
movie
看电影
19.
lie
to
sb

/

tell
sb
a
lie

/
tell
a
lie
to
sb对某人撒谎
20.
tell
the
truth讲真话
21.
talk
about谈论//
talk
to对……讲话//
talk
with
和……谈话
22.
win//lose
the
game赢得//输掉比赛
23.
have
a
birthday
party
for
sb为某人举办一个生日晚会
24.
buy
sth
for
sb
=buy
sb
sth给某人买某物
25.
bring
sth
for
sb给某人带来某物

26.
by
hand手工
27.
each
of
us我们中的每一个人(后面的动词用单数)
28.
sit
around围着坐
29.
make
a
silent
wish默默许愿
30.
blow
out吹灭
31.
in
one
breath一口气
32.
think
over考虑
33.
write
down写下来
34.
in
one’s
home在某人家
at
home在家
at
one’s
house
35.
come
to
one’s
party参加某人的晚会
36.
write
a
letter
to
sb.
/write
sb
a
letter
/write
to
sb给某人写信
37.
thank
sb
for
sth
/
doing
sth
thanks
for
sth
/
doing
sth感谢某人某事/做某事
38.
Best
wishes最良好的祝愿
39.
have
a
big
dinner举行一个丰盛的晚宴
（二）重点句型
1．How
was
Kangkang’s
birthday
party
?
康康的生日晚会怎样

It
was
very
nice.

非常好.
2．You
speak
Chinese
very
well.
你讲汉语真好
3．It’s
your
turn.
该你了。
It’s
one’s
turn
to
do
sth.
轮到某人做某事了。
4．What’s
the
matter
?
怎么了？What’s
the
trouble
?
What’s
wrong
?
5．This
way,
please.请这边走
6．We
did
see
a
movie.
我们的确看电影了。（do/did/does
+动原表强调）
7．What
else
did
you
do
at
the
party
?
在晚会上你还做别的什么了？
8．Why
didn’t
you
tell
me
the
truth
?你为什么不给我讲真话？
（三）重点语法
一般过去时
1．一般过去时表示过去某个时间发生的动作或存在的状态，常和表示过去的时间状语连用。一般过去时也表示过去经常或反复发生的动作。
2．Be动词在一般过去时中的变化：
⑴am
和is在一般过去时中变为was。（was
not=wasn’t）
⑵are在一般过去时中变为were。（were
not=weren’t）
⑶带有was或were的句子，其否定、疑问的变化和is,
am,
are一样，即否定句在was或were后加not，一般疑问句把was或were调到句首。
3．句中没有be动词的一般过去时的句子
??
否定句：didn’t
+动词原形，
如：Jim
didn’t
go
home
yesterday.
??
一般疑问句：在句首加did，句子中的动词过去式变回原形。
如：Did
Jim
go
home
yesterday?
??
特殊疑问句：⑴疑问词+did+主语+动词原形？如：What
did
Jim
do
yesterday?⑵疑问词当主语时：疑问词+动词过去式？如：Who
went
to
home
yesterday?
动词过去式变化规则：
1．一般在动词末尾加-ed，如：pull-pulled,
cook-cooked
2．结尾是e加d，如：taste-tasted
3．末尾只有一个元音字母和一个辅音字母的重读闭音节，应双写末尾的辅音字母，再加-ed，如：stop-stopped
plan-planned
trip
-tripped
4．以“辅音字母+y”结尾的，变y为i，
再加-ed，如：study-studied
5．不规则动词过去式：
am/is-was,
are-were,
do-did,
see-saw,
say-said,
give-gave,
get-got,
go-went,
come-came,
have-had,
eat-ate,
take-took,
run-ran,
sing-sang,
put-put,
make-made,
read-read,
write-wrote,
draw-drew,
drink-drank,
fly-flew,
ride-rode,
speak-spoke,
sweep-swept,
swim-swam,
sit-satUnit8
Topic1
(一)重点词组:
1.
in
summer/fall/spring/winter在夏天/秋天/冬天2.
make
a
snowman/snowmen堆雪人
3.
take
a
walk=have
a
walk散步

4.
In
most
of
China
在中国的大部分地区
most
:大部分的
5.
later
on
后来,以后
6.
be
different
from….和…..不同
7.
come
back
to
life
苏醒,复苏,复活
(二)重要句型:
1.
询问天气的两个句型:What’s
the
weather
like?/How
is
the
weather?
2.
It’s
a
good
time/season
to
do
sth=It’s
a
good
time
for
sth/doing
sth
是做什么事的好时候或好季节
It’s
a
good
time
for
sb
to
do
sth
是某人做什么事的好时候
e.g
It’s
a
good
time/season
to
swim
3.
--Why?
--Because……由why引导的句子,回答一定要用because
4.
learn
to
do
sth.
学做某事
e.g
She
is
learning
to
dance.
5.
Which
season
do
you
like
best?=What’s
your
favorite
season?
6.
询问温度:
What’s
the
temperature?
The
low
/
high
temperature
is….
The
temperature
is
from…to…
The
temperature
is
between…and…
7.
had
better
do
sth.
最好做某事
had
better
最好

had缩写’d
否定形式:
had
better
not
do
sth.

e.g
The
temperature
is
high
outside.
You’d
better
not
go
out.
8.
remember
to
do
sth.
记得去做某事(实际动作还未发生)
remember
doing
sth.
记得做过某事(实际动作已经发生)
e.g
You
must
remember
to
close
the
door.你一定要记得关门(门还没有关)
He
remembered
closing
the
door.
他记得关过门了(门已经关上了)
9.
be
busy
doing
sth
忙于做某事
e.g
He
is
busy
reading.
be
busy
with
sth
忙于…..
e.g
They
are
busy
with
housework.
(三)重要单词总结讲解:
1.
表示天气的形容词
rain------rainy

cloud------cloudysnow-----snowy

wind----windy

sun----sunny

fog----foggy

2.
wear,
be
in
和put
on
★wear穿着,戴着,强调状态,用一般现在时表示经常状态,用现在进行时
表示暂时状态.

★be
in
表示穿着的状态
e.g
We
wear
our
raincoat
on
a
rainy
day.(经常状态)
Is
she
wearing
red
clothes?
(暂时状态)
The
girl
in
pink
is
my
sister.
★Put
on
穿上,戴上,强调动作
e.g
She
put
on
a
red
coat
and
went
out.
e.g
Most
students
are
not
here.
3.
sunglasses/shorts/shoes/pants这些词通常都用复数形式
4.
get
warm
变暖和,
get是系动词,后加形容词,
类似的还有get
cold;
get
fate.g
The
weather
gets
hot
in
summer.

5.
rain
heavily

heavy
rain

snow
heavily

heavy
snow
strong
winde.g
The
wind
blows
strongly.
6.
last:
v.
延续

e.g
The
meeting
lasts
for
an
hour.

adi.上一个的,
最近的

last
TuesdayUnit
8
Topic
2
(一）
重点词语
1.
the
summer
/
winter
holiday
暑假；寒假
2.
talk
about
谈论到，谈及
3.
holiday
plans
假日计划
4.
want
to
go
想去
want
to
do
sth
=
would
like
to
do
sth
想做某事
hope
to
do
sth
希望做某事plan
to
do
sth
计划做某事
5.
around
the
country
环绕国家
6.
take
pictures
/
photos
of
给…照相
7.
pass
something
to
somebody
传递某物给某人
8.
places
of
interest
名胜古迹
9.
celebrate
something
with
somebody
和某人一起庆祝某事
10.
get
together
with
somebody
和某人聚会在一起
11.
go
on
a
trip去旅游
go
for
a
holiday
去度假
be
on
holiday
=
go
on
holiday
在度假12.
have
a
good
time
=
have
a
great
time
=
have
a
wonderful
time

=
have
a
nice
time
=
have
fun

玩得很高兴
13.the
Spring
City
春城
14.
all
the
year
round
全年
15.
the
best
time
最佳时间
16.
enter
someone’s
home
进入某人家里
17.
take
off
your
shoes
脱鞋子
18.
go
out
出去
go
back
回去
19.
point
to
指着
20.
eat
with
your
left
hand
用左手吃东西
21.
Muslin
countries
穆斯林国家
22.
touch
sb.
on
someplace
触摸某人的某个部位
23.
make
the
OK
sign
做个好了的手势
24.
arrive
on
time
按时到达
25.
a
little
late晚一点
26.
had
better
do
sth
最好做某事
had
better
not
do
sth
最好不做某事
27.
a
pair
of
sunglasses
一副太阳镜
28.
and
so
on
等等
（二）重点句型
1.
The
summer
holidays
are
coming.
暑假要来了。
2.
I
hope
to
get
together
with
them.
我希望和他们在一起。
3.
Each
of
us
has
a
good
plan
for
the
holidays.

我们每个人都有一个很好的假期计划。
4.
Can
you
tell
me
something
about
Yunnan?

你能告诉我一些云南的事情么？
5.
It
sounds
really
interesting
and
exciting.
它听起来相当有趣和令人激动。
6.
Different
countries
have
different
customs.
不同的国家有不同的风俗。
7.
You
shouldn’t
eat
with
your
left
hand.
你不能用左手吃东西。
8.
You
mustn’t
point
to
anything
with
your
foot.
你千万不要用脚指东西。
9.
Guess
what
I
bought
for
you!
猜猜我为你买了什么！

10.I
hope
you
all
have
a
good
time.
我希望你们每个人都能过得愉快
(三)重点语法

一）一般过去时的特殊疑问句：
1.
How
was
you
trip?
---It
was
wonderful.
2.
How
did
you
travel
there?
---By
train.
3.
How
long
were
you
there?
---Only
five
days.
4.--
Did
you
visit
any
places
of
interest?

--Yes,
we
visited
Mount
Emei
and
Jiuzhaigou.
二）情态动词should和shouldn’t的用法：
1.
What
places
should
I
visit
in
Yunnan?
2.
You
should
visit
Dali
and
Lijiang
and
you
shouldn’t
miss
Xishuangbanna.

3.
When
you
enter
someone’s
home,
you
should
take
off
your
shoes.

（四）交际用语：谈论旅游和风俗
1.
Where
do
you
want
to
go
?

2.
Who
would
you
like
to
travel
with?

3.
How
was
your
trip?
--It
was
wonderful.

4.
What’s
the
best
time
to
go
there?
5.
How
did
you
travel
there?
--By
train.
6.
How
long
were
you
there?
--Only
five
days.
7.
Different
countries
have
different
customs.
8.
When
you
travel
in
other
countries,
you’d
better
know
the
customs
of

those
countries.Unit
8
Topic
3
㈠短语总结
1.
春节
Spring
Festival
2.
元宵节
Lantern
Festival
3.
除夕之夜
New
Year’s
Eve
4.
母亲节
Mother’s
Day
5.
教师节
Teachers’
Day
6.
中秋节
Mid-autumn
Festival
7.
愚人节
April
Fool’s
Day
8.
吃饺子
eat
dumplings
9.
包饺子
make
dumplings
10.
表演舞龙舞狮
perform
lion
and
dragon
dances
11.
在许多国家
in
many
countries
12.
互赠礼物
give
each
other
presents/
give
presents
to
each
other
13.
在这一天
on
this
day
14.
吃元宵
eat
sweet
dumplings
15.
好运
good
luck
16.
看灯展
watch
a
lantern
show
17.
猜灯谜
guess
riddles
18.
团聚
get
together
19.
睡觉
go
to
bed
20.
知道…才
not…until
21.
在午夜
at
midnight
22.
迎接新年
welcome
the
new
year
23.
复活
come
back
to
life
24.
开某人的玩笑
play
tricks
on
sb.
25.
互相,彼此
each
other
26.
举行聚会
have
a
party/
have
parties
27.
向某人表达爱意
show
love
to
sb.
28.
给某人看某物
show
sth
to
sb./
show
sb.
sth
29.
为…做准备
prepare
for
sth
30.
打扫房子
clean
the
house
31.
去购物
go
shopping
32.
用…装饰
decorate
sth
with
sth
33.
彩灯
colorful
lights
34.
在平安夜
on
Christmas
Eve
35.
去做礼拜
go
to
church
36.
唱圣诞歌
sing
Christmas
songs
37.
把…挂起来
put
up
38.
在火炉旁边
by
the
fireplaces
39.
早起
get
up
early
40.
家庭聚会
have
a
family
get-together
41.
互相问候
greet
each
other
42.
一件大事
a
big
event
43.
开始做某事
begin/
start
to
do
sth
;
begin/
start
doing
sth
44.
全家
the
whole
family
45.
守夜,熬夜
stay
up
46.
农历新年
the
lunar
new
year
47.
压岁钱
lucky/
gift
money
48.
敲门
knock
at/
on
the
door
49.
对某人大喊
shout
to/
at
sb.
50.
五一劳动节
May
Day
/
International
Labor
Day
51.
一个七天的假期
a
seven-day
holiday
52.
去旅游
go
traveling
53.
端午节
Dragon
Boat
Festival
54.
举行龙舟比赛
hold
dragon
boat
races
55.
在许多地方
in
many
places
56.
吃粽子
eat
rice
dumplings
57.
国庆节
National
Day
58.
全国
the
whole
country
59.
…的首都/
省会
the
capital
of
…
60.
看升旗仪式
watch
the
national
flag
go
up
61.
赏月
enjoy
the
bright
full
moon
62.
恶作剧还是请客
trick
or
treat
63.
在墙上
on
the
wall
㈡重要句型
1.
They
often
eat
turkey
and
Christmas
cakes
and
give
each
other
presents.
=
give
presents
to
each
other
give
sb.
sth
=
give
sth
to
sb.
类似的有：lend,
send,
bring,
pass,
take

E.g.:
I
lent
my
bike
to
her.
=
I
lent
her
my
bike.
send
sb.
sth
=sent
sth
to
sb.
送给某人某物
bring
sb.
sth
=
bring
sth
to
sb.
给某人带来某物
take
sb.
sth
=
take
sth
to
sb.
给某人带走某物
2.
It
means
the
end
of
Spring
Festival.
它意味着春节的结束。
the
end
of
…的末端
；at
the
end
of
…在…的末端(时间和空间);
by
the
end
of
到…末端为止
E.g.
Mr.
Wang
lives
at
the
end
of
Elm
Road.
Children
put
up
stockings
at
the
end
of
their
beds.
We
can
finish
the
work
by
the
end
of
the
year.
3.
not…until直到…才
E.g.
He
came
back
after
12o’clock
last
night.
(用not…until改写)
He
didn’t
come
back
until
12
o’clock.
4.
prepare
for
sth
为某事做好准备=get
sth
ready
,其宾语为所准备的直接内容
E.g
They
are
preparing
for
the
party
this
evening.
The
students
are
preparing
for
the
exams.
5.
go
to
church
去教堂做礼拜;
go
to
the
church去教堂
go
to
school
去上学；go
to
the
school
去学校
go
to
hospital去看病；go
to
the
hospital去医院
6.
start/
begin
to
do
sth;
start/
begin
doing
sth
E.g.
He
started/
began
to
study
English
six
years
ago.
He
started/
began
singing.
7.
The
whole
family
gets
together
for
a
big
dinner.
the
whole
+单数名词(集体名词)
=
all
the
+名词
E.g
The
whole
class
is
here.
=
All
the
class
are
here.
The
whole
world
likes
football.
8.
watch
sb.
/
sth
do
看见某人/物做某事，表示动作的结果
（全过程）
watch
sb./
sth
doing看见某人/物正在做某事，表示动作正在进行
类似的有：
hear,
see

E.g.
I
hear
someone
singing
in
the
next
room.
I
often
hear
him
shout
to
others.
I
see
an
old
man
selling
books
in
the
street.
I
sometimes
see
them
play
basketball
on
the
playground.三种时态小聚会
含be动词的一般现在时的句式：
肯定句式：主语+be动词+其他。
否定句式：主语+be动词+not+其他。
一般疑问句式：be动词+主语+其他？
特殊疑问句式：特殊疑问词+be动词+主语+其他？
谓语是实义动词的一般现在时的句式：
肯定句式：主语+动词原形+其他。
否定句式：主语+don’t/doesn’t+动词原形+其他。
一般疑问句式：do/does+主语+动词原形+其他？
特殊疑问句式：特殊疑问词+do/does+主语+动词原形+其他？
注：当主语是第三人称单数时，一般要在动词原形后加-s或-es
。
现在进行时的句式：
肯定句式：主语+be动词+现在分词+其他。
否定句式：主语+be动词+not+现在分词+其他。
一般疑问句式：be动词+主语+现在分词+其他？
特殊疑问句式：特殊疑问词+be动词+主语+现在分词+其他？
含动词be的一般过去时的句式：
肯定句式：主语+be动词(was/were)+其他。
否定句式：主语+be动词(was/were)+not+其他。
一般疑问句式：be动词(was/were)+主语+其他？
特殊疑问句式：特殊疑问词+be动词(was/were)+主语+其他？
含行为动词的一般过去时的句式：
肯定句式：主语+动词的过去式+其他。
否定句式：主语+didn’t+动词原形+其他。
一般疑问句式：did+主语+动词原形+其他？
特殊疑问句式：特殊疑问词+did+主语+动词原形+其他？
温馨提示：辨析一般现在时和一般过去时，一定要认真看清时间状语。
意义
常用时间状语
构成
一般疑问式
否定式
提问谓语
一般现在时
表示经常性、习惯性的动作或状态
often
,
always
,
every
day等
①系动词am
,is
,are+表语；
②谓语为行为动词原形或第三人称单数形式
①be动词放在主语前；
②主语前加do或does
①be动词后加not；
②动词前加don’t或doesn’t（动词还原）
What
do/does+主语+do…？如：What
does
she
do
on
Saturday?
现在进行时
表示现阶段正在发生的动作或存在的状态
①now等；
②look
,listen等提示词
be动词(am
,is
,are)+V—ing
be动词置于主语前
be动词后加not
What
is/are+主语+V-ing…？如：What
are
you
doing
now?一般过去时
表示过去一段时间发生的动作或存在的状态
①yesterday
,last
year/week/month;
②a
moment
ago
,just
now等
①系动词was
,were+表语；
②谓语为行为动词的过去式
①was
,were
放在主语前；
②主语前加did
①was
,were
+not;

②动词前加didn’t
What
did+主语+do…？如：What
did
you
do
last
night?八年级英语（仁爱版）上册知识点
Unit
1
Sports
and
Games
Topic
1
Are
you
going
to
play
basketball
?
一.
重点词语:
1.
almost(反义词)never2.win(过去式)won(名词)winner
3.ski(现在分词)skiing
4.famous(比较级)more
famous
5.arrive(同义词)reach
6.leave(过去式))left7.popular(最高级)most
popular
8.healthy(同义词)fit(名词)health
(一)
词组
1.
during
the
summer
holidays

在暑假期间
2.
between…and…在两者之间
3.
cheer
sb.
on为某人加油
4.
prefer
doing
sth.更喜欢做某事
5.
quite
a
bit/a
lot
很多
6.
plan
to
do
sth.
计划做某事
7.
have
a
skating
club
举办滑雪俱乐部
8.
go
skating/skiing/bicycling/climbing/hiking

去滑雪/滑冰/骑车/爬山/远足
9.
arrive
in/at

到达
10.
play
against…
与……对抗/较量
11.
for
long

很久
12.
leave
for…动身去…
13.
the
day
after
tomorrow

后天
14.
China’s
national
team中国国家队
15.
play
baseball

打棒球
16.
at
least至少
17.
What
a
shame!
多羞愧！
18.
be
good
at
善于做某事
19.
take
part
in参加
20.
all
over
the
world

全世界
21.
be
good
for对……有益
22.
a
good
way一种好方法
23.
keep
fit/healthy
保持健康
24.
relax
oneself放松某人自己
二.
重点句型
1.
What’s
your
favorite
sport?
=
What
sport
do
you
like
best?
你最喜爱的运动是什么?
2.
Which
sport
do
you
prefer?
=
Which
sport
do
you
like
better?
你更喜欢什么运动?
I
prefer
skating.
=
I
like
skating
better.
我更喜欢滑雪.
3.
Do
you
skate
much?
=
Do
you
often
skate?
你常滑雪吗?
4.
She
spends
at
least
half
an
hour
in
the
gym
every
day.
每天她至少花半小时在体育馆.
5.
She
plays
baseball
pretty
well
and
she
is
also
good
at
jumping.

她棒球打得相当好而且擅长于跳.
6.
What
kind
of
sports
do
you
like?
=
Which
sport
do
you
like?
你喜欢哪种运动?
7.
Would
you
like
to
come
and
cheer
us
on
?
你愿意来为我们加油吗？
8.
What
are
you
going
to
be
when
you
grow
up?
当你长大后做什么？
9.
There
is
going
to
be
a
school
sports
meet
next
month.下月有一场运动会。三.
重点语言点
1.
see
sb.
do
sth
“看见某人做了某事”
强调动作的全过程,常与every
day;
often等连用.
see
sb.
doing
sth.
“看见某人正在做某事”
强调动作正在进行.如:
I
saw
you
play
basketball
almost
every
day
during
the
summer
holidays.

I
often
see
him
draw
pictures
near
the
river.
我常看见她在河边画画.

I
saw
her
go
across
the
street.
我看见她过了马路

I
saw
her
going
across
the
street.
我看见她正在过马路.[类似的有watch,
hear,
feel
等这类感观动词.
2.
join
sb.
表示
“加入某人的行列”
“和某人在一起”
join
+
组织
表示
“加入某个组织”
take
part
in

表示
“参加/出席某个活动”
如:
Will
you
join
us?
I
will
join
the
skiing
club.
She
is
planning
to
take
part
in
the
high
jump.
3.
arrive
in
+
大地点
arrive
at
+
小地点
get
to
+
地点
=
reach
+
地点
如:
My
uncle
arrived
in
Beijing
yesterday.
I
arrived
at
the
Great
Wall.
=
I
got
to
the
Great
Wall.
=
I
reached
the
Great
Wall.
注意:
reach
here/there/home
=
get
here/there/home
=
arrive
here/there/home
4.
leave…
离开……
leave
for…
动身去…/离开到…
如:
They
are
leaving
Beijing
tomorrow.
明天他们要离开北京.
They
are
leaving
for
Japan
the
day
after
tomorrow.
后天他们要前往日本.
5.
a
few
“几个;一些”
修饰可数名词
a
little
“一点点”
修饰不数名词
如:
There
are
a
few
eggs
in
the
basket.
There
is
a
little
water
in
the
bottle.
6.
how
long
表示“多久(时间)”;
提问时间段.
how
often
表示
“多常;
多久一次”;
提问时间的频率.
如:
They
will
stay
in
Beijing
for
a
week.
→
How
long
will
they
stay
in
Beijing?
He
plays
basketball
twice
a
week.
→
How
often
does
he
play
basketball?
7.be
good
at
(doing)
sth.
=
do
well
in
(doing)
sth.
擅长于(做)某事

如:
She
is
good
at
(playing)
baseball.
=
She
does
well
in
(playing)
baseball.
8.make
sth/sb
+
adj.使某物(某人)在某种状态

keep
…sth/sb
+
adj.

保持某物(某人)在某种状态

如:
Playing
soccer
can
make
your
body
strong.
Swimming
can
help
to
keep
your
heart
and
lungs
healthy.
四.
重点语法一般将来时：
（一）be
going
to
结构:
①表示主语进行某一将来行动的打算、意图。这种打算常经过预先考虑并含有自己做好某些准备的意思，因此通常认为用be
going
to表达的行动很可能会见诸实践。

如：I’m
going
to
play
basketball
with
my
classmates
this
Sunday.我打算本周日和同学们一起打篮球。She
is
going
to
buy
a
sweater
for
her
mother.

她打算为她妈妈买一件毛衣。
②表预测。指根据迹象推测，而且马上或很快就要发生。如：Look
at
those
clouds.
It’s
going
to
rain.
瞧那些乌云！快要下雨了！
（二）
will
+
动词原形：表示单纯的将来事实，常与表将来的时间状语如:tomorrow,
soon,
later,
next
time(week/month/year…)等连用。will
not
=
won’t;
缩略形式为’ll.
①
表示作出立即的决定。这种意图并未经过事先的考虑或计划，是临时的一种决定。
如：a.
----Please
put
your
things
away,
Tom.
汤姆，把你的东西收拾好。
----I’m
sorry.
I’ll
do
it
right
away.
对不起。我马上就去做。
b.
----Would
you
like
coffee
or
tea?
您要咖啡还是茶？----I
will
have
a
cup
of
tea,please.
我要一杯茶。
c.
Don’t
worry.
I’ll
help
you.
别担心。我会帮你的。
②
表示预测。指说话人对于将来的看法、假设和推测。
如：
I’m
sure
our
team
will
win
next
time.
我确信下次我们队会赢。
Maybe
she
will
go
to
the
gym.
也许她会去体育馆。
③
表示许诺。如：
I’ll
do
better
next
time.
下次我会做得更好的。
I’ll
visit
you
tomorrow.
明天我会去看你的。
句式：肯定句：I/She/He/They
will
go
to
play
baseball
soon.
否定句：I/She/He/They
won’t
go
to
play
baseball
soon.
一般疑问句：Will
you/she/he/they
go
to
play
baseball
soon?
回答：Yes,
I/she/he/they
will.
No,
I/she
/he/they
won’t.
（三）动词plan,
come,
go,
leave,
fly等用现在进行时表示将要发生的事.如：
I’m
coming.
我就来。
He
is
leaving
for
Shanghai.
他将到上海去。
We
are
going
to
Beijing.
我们将去北京。
Topic
2

Would
you
mind
teaching
me
?
一、重点词语:
（一）
词形转换：
(1)
adj.
+
ly
→
adv.
loud
→
loudlysoft
→
softly

quiet
→
quietly
clear
→
clearly
angry
→
angrily
easy
→
easily
(2)过去式：
fall
→
fell
break
→
broke
lose
→lost
throw
→
threw
feel
→
felt(3)
1.ill
(同义词)sick
(名词)illness

2.start(同义词)begin3.far(反义词)near
4.smoke(现在分词)smoking

5.careless(反义词)careful6.important(比较级)
more
important
7.Russia(公民)Russian
8.enjoy(现在分词)enjoying9.invent(名词)invention;
inventor
10.indoor(反义词)outdoor11.century(复数)centuries
12.coach(复数)coaches13.feel
(名词)feeling14.tiring(近义词)tired

(二)
词组:
1.
have
a
soccer
game
进行一场足球赛
2.
fall
ill病倒了
3.
be
a
little
far
from…离……有点远
4.
right
away
=
at
once立刻;马上
5.
miss
a
good
chance
错过一个好机会
6.
get/miss
a
goal得到/失去一分
7.
shame
on
sb.
为某人感到羞耻
8.
do
one’s
best
尽某人的力
9.
say
sorry
to
sb.对某人说抱歉
10.
be
sure
to
do
sth.

确定做某事
11.
be
angry
with…

生某人的气
12.
with
one’s
help
=
with
the
help
of
sb.
在某人的帮助下
13.
serve
food上菜
14.
turn
up/down…调高/低（音量）
15.
keep
sb.
doing
sth.
让某人一直做某事
16.
in
a
minute一分钟后；马上
17.
on
the
phone

在电话中
18.
take
a
seat
就坐
19.
never
mind不要紧
20.
a
lot
of
traveling一系列旅行
21.
love/enjoy
doing
sth.喜爱/欢做某事
22.
have
a
very
exciting
life
过着非常兴奋的生活
23.
as
well

也
24.
throw…into…
把……投进……
25.
follow/obey
the
rules遵守规则
26.
over
a
century
later
一个多世纪后
27.
more
and
more
people

越来越多的人
28.
feel
tired
感到疲劳
29.
instead
of…

替代……30.
ask
sb.
to
do
sth.叫某人做某事
31.
make
a
plan
for
sb.
为某人订一份计划
32.
build
up

增进;增强
33.
have
fun
doing
sth.
乐于做…..做某事
34.
be
important
to
对于某人来说是重要
35.
in
a
minute/
at
once/
right
away
立刻/马上二.重点句型
1.
Could
you
please
do
me
a
favor?
=
Could
you
help
me?
=
Could
you
give
me
a
hand?
你能帮我吗？

2.
Would
you
mind
teaching
me?
=
Would
you
please
teach
me?
你教我好吗？
3.
Would
you
mind
not
smoking
here
?
你不要在这里抽烟好吗？
4.
You
are
always
so
careless.
你总是这样粗心大意.
5.
I’m
very
sorry
for
what
I
said.
我为所说感到到道歉。
6.
We
are
sure
to
win
next
time
下次，我们一定回赢。
7.
Let
me
buy
you
a
new
one.
=
Let
me
buy
a
new
one
for
you.让我为你买一个新的。
8.
He
invented
an
indoor
game
for
his
students
so
that
they
could
play
it
even
in
bad
weather.
他为他的学生们发明了一项室内运动以便他们甚至在恶劣的天气也能玩。
9.
And
you
can
throw
it
with
one
hand
or
both
hands.你能用一只手或两只手投掷它。
10.
I
have
great
fun
running
and
I
feel
well
and
look
fit
我总是快乐地跑步和我感到很好，看上去很健康。
三.
重点语言点
1.
ill
与
sick
都表示
“生病的”,
只能作表语而既可作表语也可作定语.
如:
The
man
is
ill/sick.
那个男人病了.
(作表语)
He
is
a
sick
man.
他是个病人.
(作定语)
2.
Would
you
mind
(not)
doing
sth?
表示
“(不)做某事介意/好吗?”
如:
Would
you
mind
coming
and
checking
it?
来修理它好吗?
Would
you
mind
not
smoking
here?
不要在这儿吸烟好/介意吗?
3.
one
of
+
名词复数

表示
“其中之一……”,
主语是one,表单数.
如:
One
of
my
teammates
is
strong
and
tall.
其中我的一个队友又高又壮。
One
of
my
friends
likes
English
其中我的一个朋友喜欢英语。
4.
miss
“错过,思念,遗失”
如:
I
missed
the
last
bus
yesterday.
昨天我错过最后一班车.
He
missed
his
mother.
他想念他的母亲.
My
God!
I
missed(=lost)
my
key.
天啊!
我把钥匙弄丢了.
5.
be
sure
to
do
sth.
=
be
sure
that
+
句子
“确定做某事”
如:
We
are
sure
to
win
next
time.
=
We
are
sure
that
we
will
win
next
time.
我们确信下次一定会赢。
6.
be
sorry
for…
“为某事抱歉”
be
sorry
to
do
sth.
=
be
sorry
(that)
+
句子
“很抱歉做了某事”
如:
I
am
very
sorry
for
what
I
said.
我为我所说的话感到抱歉.
I’m
sorry
I
lost
your
book.
=
I’m
sorry
to
lose
your
book.很抱歉弄丢你的书。
7．tired
adj.
“（感到）疲惫的”
,
主语是人
如:
I
feel
tired
today.
今天我感到累了.
tiring
adj.
“令人疲劳的”,
主语是事物如:This
job
is
tiring.
这份工作令人疲惫.
类似的有:
excited
感到兴奋的
exciting
令人兴奋的
interested
感到有趣的
interesting
有趣的
8.15-year-old
“15岁的”
15
years
old
“15岁”
如:
He
is
a
15-year-old
boy.
=
The
boy
is
15
years
old.
类似用法:
2.5-mile
/
2.5
miles
9.
instead
“替代;相反”,
一般单独使用,放在句末,前面用逗号隔开.
instead
of…“替代……;而不……,相反”
如:
I
won’t
go
to
Shanghai.
I’ll
go
to
Beijing,
instead.
我不会去上海而会去北京.
=
I’ll
go
to
Beijing
instead
of
Shanghai.
I
drank
a
lot
of
milk
instead
of
water.
我喝了许多牛奶而不是水.
10.
have
fun
doing
sth.
=
enjoy
doing
sth.
表示
“从做…….中获得乐趣”
如:
I
have
great
fun
running.
=
I
enjoy
running.我总能在跑步中得到很大乐趣。
四、交际用语
(一)
请求和回答
Requests
Responses
Could
you
please
do
me
a
favor?
Sure.
What
is
it?
Will
you
join
us?
I’d
be
glad
to.
Would
you
mind
teaching
me?
Not
at
all.
Let’s
go
and
practice.（二）道歉和回答
Apologies
Responses
I’m
sorry
I
didn’t
call
you
last
night.
Never
mind.
I
guess
you
were
busy
last
night.
I’m
sorry
I’m
late
for
class.
That’s
OK.
Please
take
a
seat.
I’m
sorry
I
lost
your
book.
It
doesn’t
matter.
That
book
isn’t
important
to
me.
I’m
sorry
I
broke
your
pen.
Don’t
worry.
I
have
another
pen.
Topic
3
Beijing
will
host
the
2008
Olympics.一、重点词组:
1.
join
the
English
club
加入英语俱乐部
2.
host
the
2008
Olympics

举办2008年奥运会
3.
fill
out
填出/好
4.
go
on
发生；进行
5.
all
the
interesting
places

所有有趣的地方
6.
quite
a
lot
相当多
7.
make
friends
with…
与……交朋友
8.
be
afraid

恐怕
9.
be
free有空
10.
see
you
then再见
11.
win
the
first
gold
medal

赢得第一枚金牌
12.
get
28
gold
medals

获得28枚金牌
13.
the
winner
of
the
first
gold
medal

第一枚金牌的获胜者
14.
every
four
years
每四年;每隔三年
15.
the
mascot
for
the
Beijing
Olympics
北京奥运会的吉祥物
16.
behave
well举止得体
17.
improve
the
environment
改善环境
18.
plant
trees
and
grass
种植花草树木
19.
a
symbol
of
…
一种……的象征
20.
stand
for

代表
21.
the
five
parts
of
the
world
世界的五大部分
22.
do
morning
exercises
做早操
23.
be
fond
of
(doing)
sth.喜欢(做)某事二、重点句型
1.Could
you
tell
me
your
name?
你能告诉我你的名字吗?
=
What’s
your
name?
2.What
do
you
do?
=
What’s
your
job?
=
What
are
you?
你是干什么的?
3.Beijing
will
host
the
2008
Olympics.
北京将主办2008年奥运会
4.
More
and
more
foreign
friends
ride
in
my
taxi
(=
take
my
taxi)
now.

现在越来越多的外国朋友搭我的出租车.
5.Speaking
English
will
help
me
a
lot.
说英语将对我有很大帮助.
6..Please
fill
it
out.
请把它填好.
7.What
will
the
weather
be
like
this
weekend?
=
How
will
the
weather
be
this
weekend?本周末的天气怎样?
8.
There
will
be
more
roads
in
Beijing.
在北京将会有更多的马路.
9.
When
shall
we
meet?
我们什么时候见面？
10.Let’s
make
it
half
past
six.咱们把时间定在六点半吧。三.
重点语言点
1.
fill
out
+
名词
“填好……”
fill
+
名词/代词+out
如:
Please
fill
out
this
form.
=
Please
fill
this
form
out.
请填好这张表格.
Please
fill
it/them
out.
(当宾语是代词时,
只能放中间)
请把它(们)填好.
2.
be
afraid…

“恐怕”
指有礼貌地、委婉地拒绝别人.

be
afraid
of…
“害怕(做)……”

如:
I’m
afraid
I
won’t
be
free.
我恐怕没有空.
He
is
afraid
of
dogs.
他害怕狗.
They
are
afraid
of
losing
the
game.
他们害怕输了比赛.
3.
may
be
“可能是……”
may是情态动词
+
be
maybe
“或许;
可能”
maybe是副词
如:
He
may
be
a
teacher.
=
Maybe
he
is
a
teacher.
他可能是一名老师.
He
may
know
her
name.
=
Maybe
he
knows
her
name.
他可能知道她的名字.
4.
between
在两者之间
among

在三者或三者当中
如:
The
answer
is
between
A
and
B.
答案在A和B
之间.
The
winner
is
among
of
us.
获胜者在我们当中.
5.
There
be
句型的一般将来时
正:There
will
be
a
sports
meeting
in
our
school
this
weekend.

=
There
is
going
to
be
a
sports
meeting
in
our
school
this
weekend.
误:There
will
have
a
sports
meeting
in
our
school
this
weekend.

=
There
is
going
to
have
a
sports
meeting
in
our
school
this
weekend.
四、交际用语
提建议的句型:
Would
you
like
to
go
hiking
with
us?
你想和我们一起去远足吗?
What/How
about
going
hiking
with
us?
和我们一起去远足怎么样?
Why
don’t
you
go
hiking
with
us?
你为什么不和我们一起去远足呢?
Why
not
go
hiking
with
us?
为什么不和我们为什么不和我们一起去远足呢?呢?
Let’s
go
hiking.
让我们一起去远足吧!
Would
you
mind
going
hiking
with
us?
你介意和我们一起去远足吗?
Would
you
please
go
hiking
with
us?
和我们一起去远足好吗?
Unit
2

Keeping
healthy
Topic
1
How
are
you
feeling
today?
一、重点短语
1.
have
a
cold/a
toothache
/a
fever/a
cough/a
backache/a
stomachache/a
sore
throat
/the
flu
/sore
eyes感冒/牙疼/发烧/咳嗽/背疼胃疼/咽喉发炎/流感/眼疼
2.
take
a
rest=have
a
rest休息
3.
not
read
for
too
long
不要看书太久
4.
boiled
water开水
5.
stay
in
bed卧病在床，躺在床上
6.
have
a
good
sleep
好好睡一觉
7.
feel
terrible
感觉难受
8.
day
and
night
日日夜夜
9.
You`d
better=You
had
better
你最好-------
10.
not
so
well
很不好
11.
not
too
bad
没什么大碍
12.
much
better
好多了
13.
go
to
see
a
doctor
去看病
14.
take
/have
some
medicine
吃药
15.
take------to-----
把--------带到--------
16.
send------to-------
把-------送到-------
17.
hot
tea
with
honey
加蜂蜜的热茶
18.
lie
down
躺下
19.
look
after=take
care
of
照看，照顾
20.
brush
teeth
刷牙
21.
have
an
accident
发生一次意外/事故
22.
don`t
worry
别担心
23.
worry
about
担心--------
24.
nothing
serious
没什么严重，没什么大碍
25.
check
over
诊断，仔细检查
26.
thank
you
for------------
因--------而感谢你
27.
buy------for----
为------买------
28.
not------until----
直到-------才----
29.
ice
cream
冰淇淋
30.
both----and---------和-------都是----
31.
take
some
cold
pills
吃感冒药
32.
plenty
of
许多，大量
二、重点句型
1.
What`s
wrong
with
you/him/her?你/他/她怎么了？同一句：What`s
the
matter
with-------?What`s
the
trouble
with------?
2.You
should
see
a
dentist.你应该去看牙医。这是一种表达建议的句子。还可以用以下句式：
you`d
better(not)-------how
/what
about--------why
not/don`t
you
--------
3.I`m
sorry
to
hear
that.听到这个消息我很难过。这是表示同情别人的句子。
4.You
look
pale.你看起来很苍白。（1）在英语中表示气色不好，苍白，不用whit，而用pale

（2）“look
”在这里译作“看起来”，作连系动词，后接形容词。如：
You
look
beautiful。你看起来很漂亮。与look用法相同的连系动词还有
tast
，sound
，smell
，feel
。如：
The
soup
tastes
very
delicious
.这汤尝起来真香。
Your
voice
sound
nice.你的声音听起来很动人。
The
flowers
smell
sweet
.这些花闻起来很香。
The
silk
feels
smooth
丝绸摸起来很光滑。
5.------Shall
I
take
you
to
the
hospital?我送你去医院吧？-------No,thank
you.不用，谢谢。
Shall
I
do----需要我做-------吗？
take
sb
to-----------把某人送到某地
6.
I`ll
take
some
medicine
and
see
how
it
goes.
我打算先吃药看看情况再说。
“goes”在这里指事情的进展。“it
”用来代指病情。如：
How
is
everything
going?一切进展如何？
Everything
is
going
well.一切进展顺利。
7.You`d
better
drink
hot
tea
with
honey.你最好喝加蜂蜜的热茶。
tea
with
honey
加了蜂蜜的茶，with表示一种伴随状态。类似的表达还有：

some
coffee
with
sugar
and
milk加了牛奶和糖的咖啡

some
tea
without
sugar不加糖的茶
8.Michael
had
an
accident
yesterday.昨天迈克发生了事故。had
an
accident发生了事故
9.But
my
left
leg
still
hurts
when
I
move
it.可是当我挪动脚时，还是有点儿疼。
句中“hurt”译为“疼痛”，作不及物动词。后不可接宾语。如：
my
head
hurts.
10.Your
X-rays
show
it`s
nothing
serious.你的X光照片显示没什么严重的问题。
nothing
serious
没什么严重的。nothing
，something
，anything等不定代词，被形容词修饰时，形容词位于其后。如：
I
have
something
important
to
say.我有一些重要的事情要说。
11.Stay
in
bed
and
don`t
move
your
leg
too
much.躺在床上，不要总是挪动你的腿。
12.Michael`s
friends
bought
some
chocolate
for
him
.迈克的朋友给他买饿一些巧克力。
buy
sth
for
sb.双宾语的运用。使用双宾语时，在人宾前需要使用介词，有时用“to”有时用“for
”，这与动词本身有关，表示动词的方向，多用“to”，表示动词的目的，多用“
for
”
give
sth
to
sb.
pass
sth
to
sb.
bring
sth
to
sb.
take
sth
to
sb.
cook
sth
for
sb.buy
sth
for
to
sb
.
13.------but
I
couldn`t
read
them
until
today.但是直到今天我才读了它们。
not
----until直到------才-------until
在肯定句动词一般用延续性动词，在否定句中动词一般为短暂性动词。如：
He
will
wait
for
his
father
until
ten
o`clock.他将等他父亲一直到10点钟。
He
won`t
leave
until
his
father
comes.他直到他父亲回来才离开。
三、语法学习
1、
had
better
的形式和用法
1）
固定短语had
better具有情态意义，也可以看作情态动词。译为“最好”，它只有一种形式，没有人称和数的变化，后常跟动词原形，是给人提出建议的一种方式。如：

You
had
better
go
to
see
the
doctor你最好去看医生。
You`d
better
eat
a
lot
of
fruit
and
drink
plenty
of
water.你最好多吃水果，多喝水。
2）Had
better的否定结构为
had
better
not。如：
You`d
better
not
eat
hot
food你最好别吃辛辣的食物。
You`d
better
not
work
today.你今天最好别工作。
2、
shall的用法
1）
作助动词时，英式英语中表示将来，可与第一人称连用，但在口语中所有人称都用will。如：

this
time
next
week
Ishall/will
be
in
New
York.下周这个时候我就在纽约了。
拄：美语则不管什么人称，一律用will。
2）作情态动词时表征询意见，用于第一人称的疑问句中。如：
Shall
Itake
you
to
the
hospital?要不要我带你去医院？
What
shall
we
do
this
weekend?这个周末我们要作什么呢？Topic
2
I
must
ask
him
to
give
up
smoking
一、重点短语
1.
stay
up
late熬夜
2.
be
bad
for对------有害
3.
be
good
for对------有益
4.
too
much太多，过分
5.
do
morning
exercises做早操
6.
keep
long
fingernails长长指甲
7.
play
sports
right进行适当的体育锻炼
8.
go
to
school
without
breakfast不吃早餐去上学
9.
have
a
bath洗澡
10.
take
a
fresh
breath呼吸新鲜空气
11.
read
----about---读关于-------
12.
Ren`ai
English
Post仁爱英语报
13.
ask
sb
to
do叫某人做某事
14.
give
up放弃
15.
read
in
the
sun在太阳底下看书
16.
throw
litter
about乱扔垃圾
17.
on
the
lawn在草坪上
18.
put------into------把-------放进-----
19.
exercise
on
an
empty
stomach空腹锻炼
20.
get
into进入
21.
keep
the
air
clean
and
fresh保持空气清新
22.
wash
hands
before
meals饭前洗手
23.
potato
chips炸薯条
二、重点句型
1.
Staying
up
late
is
bad
for
your
health.熬夜有害健康。
1）
stay
up
late熬夜
2）
be
bad
for对--------有害。类似的短语还有：
be
good
for---对------有好处
3）
staying
up
late
is---动名词作主语。当我们需要一个动词充当主语时，常用此动词的动名词（即doing）形式。如：
Playing
basketball
is
good
for
your
heath.打篮球对你的身体有好处。
Reading
in
bed
is
bad
for
your
eyes.躺在床上看书对眼睛有害。
Swimming
is
my
hobby.游泳是我的爱好。
2.
It
will
keep
you
active
during
the
day.它会使你在白天保持活力。
keep
sth/sb
.+adj.保持某物/某人在某种状态。如：
keep
your
fingernails
clean.保持你的指甲干净。
keep
our
streets
clean.让街道保持干净。
3.
Different
foods
help
us
in
different
ways不同的食物对我们有不同的作用.
in
different
ways.译为“用不同的方式”。
4.
If
we
eat
too
little
or
too
much
food-----如果我们吃太少或太多食物------
little
少得几乎没有，表否定，修饰不可数名词。
a
little有一些，表示肯定，修饰不可数名词。
与
little
，a
little类似的用法的还有
few，
a
few
。
few少得几乎没有，表否定，修饰可数名词。
a
few有一些，表示肯定，修饰可数名词。
5.
Walking
is
good
exercise
and
it
is
necessary
for
good
health.
散步是很好的锻炼，它是身体健康必不可少的。
be
necessary
for----对--------来说是必不可少的
如：
Sunshine
is
necessary
for
our
life.阳光对于我们的生活来说是必不可少的。
Food
is
necessary
for
life.食物是生命所必需的。
三、语法学习
1）
情态动词must及其否定形式
must
not

must
译为“必须做------”其否定意义“不必做-------”，用don`t
have
to
表示，而不用must
not
。如：
——must
I
finish
it
tonight?
——No,
you
don`t
have
to.
而must
not
译作“禁止做--------”。如：
You
must
not
throw
litter
about.
Don`t
throw
litter
about.别到处乱扔垃圾。
2）
情态动词may
may有两种含义，表示请求允许，译作“可以”。如：
May
I
come
in
?我可以进来吗？
表示推测，译作“可能”。如：
You
may
get
a
headache
when
you
work
too
hard.当你工作太累时你可能回感到头疼。
You
may
get
a
headache
when
you
can`t
get
enough
sleep.
当你睡眠不足时，你可能会头疼。
enough
sleep
充足的睡眠。
enough
修饰名词时放在前后均可；当它修饰形容词时，一般放在形容词后面。如：
strong
enough足够强壮Topic
3
what
should
we
do
to
fight
SARS?一、
重点短语
1.
hurry
up快点，赶快
2.
go
ahead（尤指经某人允许）开始，干下去，走在前面，领先
3.
do
more
exercise多锻炼
4.
do
some
cleaning做扫除
5.
all
the
time一直
6.
have
to不得不，必须
7.
keep
away远离-------
8.
just
a
moment稍等一会儿
9.
get
through拨通（电话）；通过
10.
take
care
of照顾
11.
care
for照顾（病人）；照料；喜欢
12.
talk
with和----交谈
13.
enjoy
oneself过得愉快
14.
Chinese
medicine中药
15.
since
then从那时起
16.
get
lost丢失了，迷路
17.
on
one`s
way
to----在某人去----------的路上
18.
by
mistake错误地
19.
ask
for
leave请假
20.
healthy
food健康食物
21.
crowded
places拥挤的地方
22.
do
one`s
best尽力
23.
change
clothes
often常换衣服
24.
wash
hands
often常洗手
25.
ring------up打电话给--------
26.
leave
a
message
留口信
27.
take
a
message带口信
28.
call----back给------回电话
29.
take
an
active
part
in积极参加
30.
the
name
of-----
-------的名称
31.
what
do
you
think
of------

？你认为---------怎么样？
32.
have
a
good
time=enjoy
oneself过得愉快
33.
next
time下次
34.
let
-------out让-------出去
35.
teach
oneself
on
the
Internet网上自学
36.
be
afraid
of害怕-----，恐惧-------
二、重点句型
1.
Sure,go
ahead.当然可以，请问吧！
ahead
意思是向前，这里的go
ahead原意为向前走，在这里译作继续问问题，相当于go
on
2.
Please
tell
my
father
to
take
care
of
himself
请告诉我爸爸照顾好自己。
take
care
of
照顾，照料。同义词：look
after
tell
sb
to
do
sthask
sb
to
do
sth

want
sb
to
do
sth

get
sb
to
do
sth

表示让某人去做某时事
3.
can
I
take
a
message?我能为您梢个口信吗？
take
a
message
梢口信
leave
a
message
留口信
give
a
message
to
--------给某人一个口信
4.
I`ll
tell
her
when
she
comes
back.她一回来我就告诉她。
本句是由when引导的时间状语从句。当主句的动词用一般将来时时，从句一般用现在时。如：

He`ll
phoneme
when
he
arrives
in
Beijing
.当他到北京时，他将回给我打电话。
5.
------,he
took
an
active
part
in
the
battle
against
it.他积极投身于抗击“非典”的战斗中。
against
与---相对抗
take
part
in--------参加--------；加入到某种活动中
take
an
active
part
in----积极参加，如：
You
should
take
an
active
part
in
the
sports
meet
in
your
school.你应该积极参加你们学校的运动会。
6.
He
cared
for
the
patients.他日夜关心着病人。
care
for
sb---
关心某人
7.
It`s
my
duty
to
save
the
patients.
救治病人是我的职责。
it`s------to
do-----
做某事是---------在此句式中，“to
do
---
”是真正的主语，而“it
”是形式主语，类似的句式有：
It`s
dangerous
to
climb
the
tree.怕树很危险。
8.
Long
time
no
see.
好久没见！
这是一句常用口语，在久别重逢的朋友之间，还可以说
“Haven`t
seen
you
for
a
long
time！”。
9.
I
taught
myself
on
the
Internet.
我在网上自学。
1）
on
the
Internet
在网络上。介词on用来表示在网上、电视上、收音机里、电话里。如：
2）
on
the
phone，
on
the
radio
，on
tv
3）
teach
oneself自学，近义词组为：
learn
by
oneself
10.
How
often
does
Mr
Brown
exercise?
布朗先生多长时间锻炼一次？
how
often对频率提问，回答用
once/twice/three
times-----a
day/a
week/-----
；
exercise在这里为动词，意思是“锻炼，运动”。
三、
语法学习
1.反身代词的形式
单数
复数
myselfourselves
yourself

yourselves
himself
herself

themselves
itself
2、反身代词的用法
1）“by+反身代词”表示“单独地，独自一人地”。如：
The
boy
couldn`t
make
the
model
plane
by
himself那个男孩不能独自制作飞机模型。
2）反身代词常与一些动词连用。如：
“teach+反身代词”表示“自学”；“
hurt+反身代词”表示“伤到自己”。如：
Jane
teaches
herself
English.简自学英语。
Lily
fell
down
and
hurt
herself
yesterday.
昨天莉莉自己摔伤了。
注：反身代词与个别动词搭配使用，意思发生变化。如：
“help
+反身代词+to----”表示“随便吃-----”；
“
enjoy+反身代词”表示“-----玩得开心”。
Help
yourself
to
some
strawberries,
please.请随便吃些草莓。
They
enjoyed
themselves
at
the
party
last
night.昨晚在晚会上他们玩得很开心。
3）反身代词作名词或代词的同位语时，起加强语气的作用，可译为“亲自，本人”。如：
You
`d
better
ask
your
teacher
about
it
yourself.你最好亲自去问你的老师。
Unit3
My
Hobby
Topic
1
I
love
collecting
stamps一.重点词汇
hobby
爱好vacation假期painting
绘画friendship友谊knowledge
知识daily
每日的whether
是否

such
as
例如
used
to
do
sth.
过去常常做某事

take
a
bath
洗澡
be
interested
in
对……感兴趣
go
dancing
跳舞
go
boating
划船
play
volleyball
打排球
swimming
游泳
drawing
画画
collecting
stamps
集邮

collecting
coins
收藏硬币
listening
to
pop
music
听流行音乐

listening
to
classical
music
听古典音乐
listening
to
symphony
听交响乐
walking
in
the
countryside
在乡间散步二.重点句型：
1.Wow!
So
many
stamps!(Page
53)哇，那么多的邮票！
本句意为：There
are
so
many
stamps.
so
many意思是“那么多”，so
much意思也是“那么多”。如：
1）There
are
so
many
flowers.
Or:
So
many
flowers！这里有这么多的花。
2)There
is
so
much
water
on
the
table.
Or:
So
much
water!桌子上有那么多的水。
2.
We
can
learn
a
lot
about
people,
places,
history,
and
special
times
from
stamps.
(Page
53)通过这些邮票我们可以学到许多关于人文、地理、历史和特殊时代的知识。
a
lot
“许多、大量”，用在动词后，同very
much。如:
1）She
had
told
me
a
lot
about
how
to
learn
English
well.
她告诉我许多有关怎样学好英语的方法。
2）Thanks
a
lot.非常感谢。
另外，a
lot
of
和lots
of
的意思也是“许多、大量”，要用在名词前，在肯定句中常代替much，many。在口语中尤其如此。如：
There
are
a
lot
of
/
lots
of
history
books
in
the
room.屋里有许多历史书。
There
is
still
a
lot
of
/
lots
of
snow
on
top
of
the
house.房上仍有许多雪。
We
have
had
a
lot
of
/
lots
of
fruits.
我们吃过许多水果。
a
lot
of和lots
of之间没有多大区别，都可以与可数名词和不可数名词连用。与不可数名词连用时，动词用单数，与可数名词连用时，动词用复数。见上述例句。3.Would
you
like
to
collect
any
of
these
things?
(Page
53)你想集下面这些东西吗?
would
you
like
to
+动词原形，表示“想要……”如:
1)
Would
you
like
to
have
a
cup
of
coffee?
你想要一杯咖啡吗？
2)Would
you
like
to
have
something
to
drink？你想要点喝的吗？
any
用在疑问句、条件从句中，可以翻译为“什么”、“一些”。如:
1)Are
there
any
letters
for
me?
这有我的信吗？
2)If
you
have
any
trouble,
please
let
me
know.
如果你有什么困难，请告诉我。
4.
What
things
do
you
love
collecting?
(Page
53)你喜欢集什么东西？
love
+
doing表示“喜欢、爱好”，也可以用like+
doing表示。如：
1）I
love
listening
to
the
music.我爱好听音乐。
2）I
love
skating.我喜欢溜冰。
5.I
am
interested
in
playing
sports.
(Page
54)我对运动感兴趣。
be
interested
in
(doing)
sth.
“对……感兴趣”如:
1）I
am
interested
in
reading
books.我对读书特别感兴趣。
2）Jack
is
interested
in
football.杰克对足球很感兴趣。
6.What
do
you
often
do
in
your
spare
time?
(Page
55)
在你的业余时间里面你都做些什么啊？
in
one’s
spare
time
“在业余时间”“在闲暇之际”，也可用in
one’s
free
time替换。如:
1）I
shall
do
it
in
my
spare
time.
我会在我的业余时间做这件事。
2）In
my
free
time
I
often
go
to
the
movies.在闲暇之际，我常去看电影。
7.
I
often
go
fishing.
(Page
55)我经常去钓鱼。
go
+
doing表示“去做某事”
go
+v-ing结构很常用，多用于体育活动和业余娱乐活动。如:
1)Let’s
go
fishing
next
Sunday.下星期天我们去钓鱼吧。
2)Are
you
going
hiking
this
weekend?这个周末你打算去远足吗？
另外还有：go
hunting
去打猎
go
shooting
去射击
go
swimming
去游泳
go
bathing
去沐浴
go
shopping
去购物
go
climbing
去爬山
8.And
I
do
a
lot
of
reading.
(Page
55)我通常都是阅读一些书籍。
在英语中有不少由“do
+
doing”的结构，表示“干某事”。如：
散步
do
some
walkingdo
a
lot
of
walking
读书
do
some
readingdo
a
lot
of
reading
洗衣服
do
some
washingdo
a
lot
of
washing
买东西
do
some
shopping
do
a
lot
of
shopping
清扫
do
some
cleaning
do
a
lot
of
cleaning9．Im
a
movie
fan.
(page
55)我是一个电影迷。
fan(运动、电影等)狂热爱好者。如:
a
film
/
football
/
star
fan

同时，fan作为名词还有“风扇”的意思。如：electric
fan
电扇。
10．I
also
rent
VCDs
and
watch
them
at
home.
(Page
55)

我也租一些VCD在家看。
watch
“观看、注视”。如：
1)
I
like
to
watch
TV.我喜欢看电视。
2)
Are
you
going
to
play
or
watch?你将参加比赛还是只是去看看？
11.Why
not
go
out
and
do
some
outdoor
activities?
(Page
55)
为什么不走出去做一些户外运动呢？
这是一个省略句，全句可以说成Why
shall
we
not
go
out
and
do
some
outdoor
activities?常在口语中使用，用来征求对方的意见或表达建议。使用这种句子必须要有上下文，如：
1）Why
not
meet
at
the
school
gate?我们在校门口见面好吗？
2）Why
not
run
a
little
faster?为什么不跑快一点呢？
some“一些、几个”，用在疑问句中,
表示希望得到肯定回答。如：
1）Would
you
like
to
give
us
some
good
advice?请给我们一些好的建议好吗？

2）Would
you
like
some
coffee
or
tea?请问，你是想喝咖啡还是茶？
12.Maybe
I
need
a
change.
(Page
55)
或许我需要改变。
maybe
“也许、可能、大概”。如：
1）Maybe
he
will
come,
maybe
he
won’t.也许他来，也许他不来。
2）—Is
that
true?那是真的吗？
—Maybe,
I
am
not
sure.也许，我也不敢肯定。
13.My
interests
are
changing
all
the
time.
(Page
56)
我的兴趣爱好总是在不断地改变。
all
the
time“总是、一直”。如：
1）Why
are
you
playing
all
the
time?
你为什么总是玩啊？
2）Look
at
these
monkeys,
they
are
jumping
all
the
time.
看看这些猴子，它们一直跳个不停。
14.
And
I
wasn’t
interested
in
sports
at
all.
(Page
56)我对运动一点兴趣都没有。
not...at
all
“一点也不……”；“全然不”。如：
1）I
didn’t
mind
it
at
all.
我一点也不在意。
2）—Thank
you
for
helping
me.谢谢你帮助我。
—Not
at
all.没关系。
3）He
didn’t
know
that
at
all.
他对此事一无所知。

15.
But
now,
my
hobbies
are
sports,
like
soccer
and
swimming.
(Page
56)
但是现在我的爱好是体育，比如足球和游泳。
like
“像……，好比……”。如：
1)He
swims
very
quickly
like
a
fish.他游泳非常地快，像一条鱼。
2)
The
cake
is
round
like
a
moon.这块蛋糕是圆的，就像月亮一样。
16.
I
never
miss
any
important
soccer
games.
(Page
56)
我从未错过任何一场重要的足球比赛。
never
“未曾、从未”，表示否定。如：
1)I
have
never
met
him
before.我以前从未见过他。
2)
You
have
never
been
to
the
Great
Wall,
have
you?你从未去过长城，是吗？
17.
I
used
to
know
little
about
paintings.
(Page
56)我过去不太懂绘画。
little和few都含有否定的意思。表示“不多”；“很少”。little相当于not
much,
few相当于not
many。little与不可数名词连用,
few与可数名词复数连用。如：
1)I
have
little
time.我的时间很少。
2)
I
understood
little
of
his
speech.他的话我没有明白多少。
3)
Few
of
the
students
passed
the
exam.没有几个学生考试及格。
Few
people
would
agree
with
him.没有多少人同意他。
而a
little和a
few含有肯定的意思，表示“一些”；“几个”（虽然少，但有一些）。如：
1)I
know
a
little
French.我多少还懂点儿法语。
2)
There’s
a
little
water
in
the
glass.杯子里还有点儿水。
3)
Can
you
stay
a
few
days
longer?你能多呆几天吗？
4)I
still
have
a
few
friends
in
Beijing.我在北京还有几个朋友。
18.
I
enjoy
listening
to
rock
music.
(Page
56)我喜欢听摇滚音乐。
like,
love,
enjoy和prefer，这四个词都有“喜欢”之意，但用法不同。试比较：
like意为“喜欢、爱好”，语气较弱，其后可跟名词、代词、不定式、动名词等作宾语。like也常跟复合宾语，宾语补足语常用动词不定式。如：
1）In
England，
many
people
like
fish
and
chips.
在英国，许多人喜欢鱼和油炸土豆条。
2）Jack
likes
playing
football.杰克爱踢足球。
3）I
don’t
like
to
eat
apples
now.现在我不想吃苹果。
love意为“爱，热爱，喜欢”，常指对祖国、亲人及朋友的爱，也可用于事物，强调非常喜欢，具有较强的感情色彩。其后可跟名词、动名词、代词或不定式作宾语。如：
1）Father
loves
his
work.爸爸热爱他的工作。
2）I
love
watching
TV.我爱看电视。
3）Children
love
to
play
this
game.孩子们爱做这种游戏。
4）We
all
love
our
great
motherland.我们热爱我们伟大的祖国。
enjoy意为“喜欢，欣赏”，含有“乐于、享受……之乐趣”之意，其后可以跟名词、代词或动名词作宾语。enjoy
oneself表示“玩得愉快”之意。
1）The
Greens
enjoy
living
in
China.格林一家喜欢在中国居住。
2）Did
you
enjoy
yourself
in
the
zoo?你在动物园玩得愉快吗？
3）Many
foreigners
enjoy
Chinese
food.很多外国人喜欢中国菜。
prefer意为“宁愿、更喜欢”，常用于两者之间的选择，其后可跟名词、代词、动名词或不定式。prefer...to...表示“宁愿……，不愿……”，“喜欢……而不喜欢……”，其中to为介词，后可跟名词或动名词。如：
1）Which
do
you
prefer,
tea
or
coffee?你比较喜欢喝茶，还是喝咖啡？
2）I
prefer
walking
to
cycling.我喜欢步行胜过骑单车。
3）My
brother
likes
Maths,
but
I
prefer
English.
我哥哥喜欢数学，而我更喜欢英语。
19.Did
you
use
to
go
swimming
during
summer
vacations?
(Page
57)

在暑假里，你过去经常去游泳么？
during
“在……的期间、在……的时候”。如：
1）The
sun
gives
us
light
during
the
daytime.太阳在白天给我们阳光。
2)
He
called
to
see
me
during
my
absence.当我不在的时候他来访过我。
20．I
used
to
do
that
in
the
pond
in
front
of
my
house.
(
Page
57)
我过去常在我家门前的池塘里游泳。
in
front
of
“在……的前面”；指在物体外部的前面。而in
the
front
of
“……的前部”；指在物体内部的前面，即前部。注意它们的区别。试比较：
1）There
is
a
tall
tree
in
front
of
my
house.我家房前有一棵大树。
2）Don’t
stand
in
front
of
me.
I
can’t
see
the
blackboard.
别站在我前面。我都看不见黑板了。
3）The
teacher
is
giving
a
lesson
in
the
front
of
the
classroom.
老师在教室的前面讲课。
4)
The
driver
is
sitting
in
the
front
of
the
car.司机坐在汽车的前面。
21．Nobody.
I
taught
myself.
(
Page
57)
没有任何人，我自学的。
teach
oneself
“自学、自修”。teach动词“教授、教……”有些动词后常跟反身代词，如：enjoy
oneself
“过得愉快”,
help
oneself
“随便吃（用）……”。如：
1)She
teaches
history
in
our
school.她在我们学校教历史。
2)She
taught
his
son
English
when
he
was
3
years
old.她儿子3岁时，她就教他英语。
3）Did
you
enjoy
yourselves
in
the
party?你们在舞会上玩得愉快吗？
4）Help
yourself
to
some
fruit.请随便吃些水果吧。
22.When
they
are
free,
people
usually
do
what
they
like.
(Page
58)

当人们空闲的时候，他们总是做一些自己喜欢的事情。
free
“有空、空闲”，
be
free可以替换为have
time。如：
1）Are
you
free
this
evening?
=
Do
you
have
time
this
evening?
你今天晚上有空吗？
2)If
I
am
free,
I
am
going
to
visit
the
museum.
=
If
I
have
time,
I
am
going
to
visit
the
museum.如果有时间，我打算去参观博物馆。
23.They
also
paint
pictures
or
collect
things
such
as
coins,
dolls
or
stamps.
(Page
58)

他们也绘画或者收集一些东西，例如：硬币、娃娃或邮票。
such
as
“像……、比如……、诸如……”如：
1）We
study
several
subjects,
such
as
Chinese,
maths,
English
and
physics.
我们学习很多的科目，比如语文、数学、英语和物理。
2）I
can
name
some
animals
in
the
zoo,
such
as
tiger,
wolf,
fox
and
so
on.
我可以叫出动物园里一些动物的名字，如老虎，狼，狐狸等。
24．When
people
become
old,
hobbies
can
keep
them
healthy.
When
people
are
sick,
hobbies
can
help
them
get
well
sooner.(Page
58)
当人们变老的时候，爱好可以帮助他们保持健康。当人们身体虚弱的时候，爱好还可以帮助他们很快地康复。
本句中become,
keep,
be,
与get都是系动词。系动词的基本用法是其后加形容词做表语。系动词一共可以分为两大类：表示状态的和表示状态变化的。
系动词表示状态的又分为以下三类：
1)be,
seem,
appear等。
2)由感官动词变化而来的，翻译成中文通常可以翻译成“……起来”，这些系动词有：look,
sound,
feel,
taste,
smell等。
3)由不及物动词转化而来的，这些系动词有：stand,
keep,
prove,
remain
系动词表示状态变化的包括：become,
go,
get,
grow,
turn,
fall等。如：
1）Coffee
smells
nice.咖啡闻起来好香。
2）After
hearing
that,
his
face
went
red.听完，他的脸红了。
3）The
days
get
longer
and
longer
in
spring.春天白天变得越来越长了。
24．I
call
him
Pink
pig.
The
color
of
his
skin
is
light
pink.
(
Page
59)

我叫他粉色，因为他的皮肤是淡粉色的。
light“淡色的、浅色的”，而dark的意思则是“深色的、暗淡的”。如：
1)Which
dress
do
you
like,
the
light
one
or
the
dark
one?
你喜欢哪条裙子，浅色的还是深色的？
2)It
is
dark
now.
Let’s
go
home
quickly.
天黑了，咱们快点儿回家吧。
25．Pink
likes
to
have
a
bath.(
Page
59)
Pink喜欢洗澡。
have
a
bath
洗澡
短语have
a
bath与动词bathe意思一样，但前者表示在有限的时间里进行某项活动。如：
游泳
have
a
swim谈一谈
have
a
talk
洗一洗
have
a
wash骑马
have
a
ride
看一看
have
a
look休息一下
have
a
rest

26.How
do
you
take
care
of
them?
(
Page
59)你怎样照顾它们？
take
care
of
照顾，类似的说法还有look
after。如：
1)The
girl
is
too
young
to
take
care
of
herself.这姑娘太小了还不能照顾自己。
2)
The
old
man
is
taken
good
care
of
by
his
children.这位老人被他的孩子们精心地照顾着。
3)My
mother
is
ill.
I
have
to
look
after
her
at
home.我妈妈病了，我得在家照顾她。
4）You
must
look
after
your
things.
你必须照看好你自己的东西。三.语法学习
1.I
used
to
listen
to
rock
music
but
now
I
collect
telephone
cards
and
paintings.
(Page
53)
我过去常听摇滚乐，可现在我集电话卡和画。
used
to
do
sth.
这一结构表示过去的习惯（过去经常反复发生的动作）或状态（暗含的意思是现在已不复存在），只有一种形式，即过去式，用于所有人称。used
to的否定形式为：used
not
to
do或didn’t
use
to
do。疑问句为Used
you
to...
?
或
Did
you
use
to...?如：
1）I
used
to
go
to
school
on
foot.

我过去步行上学。（暗含的意思是：我现在不再步行上学了。）
2）Mary
used
to
sleep
late.
玛莉过去总是很晚才睡觉。（暗含的意思是：玛莉现在睡觉不再那么晚了。）
3)I
used
to
walk
along
the
road
after
supper.
我过去常常在晚饭后沿着这条马路散步。
4)He
used
not
to
like
Peking
opera,
but
now
he’s
very
fond
of
it.
他过去不喜欢京剧，但现在非常喜欢。
现在大多数人在口语中或不太正式的书面语中对否定句和疑问句常使用与do
连用的形式。例如：
1)I
didn’t
use
to
like
skating,
but
now
I
like
it
very
much.
我过去不喜欢滑冰，但现在很喜欢。
2)Did
you
use
to
go
there?你以往常去哪儿？
3)There
used
to
be
a
theatre
here,
didn’t
there?以前这里有一座剧院，是不是？
另外，注意be
used
to
doing
sth.与used
to
do
sth.的区别：
be
used
to
doing
sth
“习惯于……，适应于……”如:
1）He
is
used
to
working
hard.
他习惯于努力地工作。
2）He
used
to
bring
me
roses
when
he
came
to
see
me.
过去他来看我时,常带玫瑰花。
3）I’m
used
to
doing
jogging
in
the
morning
now.
我习惯于早上慢跑。
be
used
to
do
sth.“某物被用来做某事”。如：
1）Wood
is
used
to
make
paper.
木材被用来生产纸张。
2）Computers
can
be
used
to
do
a
lot
of
work
now.
如今电脑可用来做许多事。2.
Collecting
stamps
must
be
great
fun!
(Page
53)集邮肯定很有趣！
must在这里是情态动词，作用是用来表示推测，可以翻译为“想必”。如:
1)Your
brother
must
be
in
the
school.
I
saw
him
just
now.
你的哥哥想必在学校。我刚才看见他了。
2)Your
friend
must
have
left
for
Nanjing
yesterday.
你的朋友想必昨天已经离开去南京了。
3)
She
thought
that
her
present
must
be
in
the
box.她以为礼物一定是在盒子里。
4)
You
must
be
thirsty
after
a
long
walk.走了很长的路，你一定渴了。
5)
It
must
be
ten
o’clock
now.现在肯定有10点钟了。
情态动词must的三种否定形式
must表示“必须”时，其否定回答为don’t
have
to，意思为“不需要”。如:
1）Must
I
pay
back
the
money
right
now?
No,
you
don’t
have
to.
我必须现在偿还这笔钱吗？不，你不需要现在还。
2）You
must
listen
to
the
teacher
carefully
in
class.
你必须在课堂上认真听讲。
must表示“推测”时，其否定形式为can’t，意思为“不可能”。如:
1）I’ve
seen
what
she
is
talking
about,
so
she
can’t
be
telling
lies.
我目睹了她所说的事情，因此，她不可能在说谎。
2）Yesterday
I
received
a
letter
from
him,
so
he
can’t
be
here.

昨天我收到了他的信，所以说他不可能在这儿。
而must
not的意思为“绝对不可，不许，禁止”。如：
1）You
must
not
smoke
in
the
hospital.你绝对不可以在医院里吸烟。
2）You
must
not
cross
the
road
when
the
traffic
lights
are
red.
交通灯是红色时，你千万不能过马路。3.He
doesn’t
mind
whether
they’re
good
or
not.
(
Page
59)

他并不介意它们是否是好的。
此句为以whether引导的宾语从句。whether...or
not“不论是否……”。如：

1）You
have
to
get
up
early
everyday
whether
it
rains
or
not.
你必须天天早点起床，不论是否下雨。
2）Whether
we
go
or
not
matters
little.不论我们是否去，关系不大。
if与whether的区别。
二者在引导宾语从句时一般可换用。如：
1)I
want
to
know
if
/
whether
it
is
going
to
rain
tomorrow.
我想知道明天是否下雨。
2)
He
asked
me
if
/
whether
Li
Ping
was
at
home.他问我李平是否在家。
3)
He
didn’t
understand
if
/
whether
the
stranger
told
a
lie.
他不明白那个陌生人是否说的是假话。

但下列几种情况不能换用。
whether
后可紧接or
not，而if一般不能。

Let
me
know
whether
or
not
you
can
come.
你能来还是不能来，请告诉我一声。
whether引导的宾语从句可移到主句前，if则不能。如：
Whether
this
is
true
or
not,
I
can
not
say.
这件事是否真实，我说不上。
不定式前用whether，不用if。如：
I
haven’t
decided
whether
to
go
to
the
cinema
or
to
stay
at
home.
我还没有决定是看电影还是留在家里。
介词后可用whether，不用if。如：
I
haven’t
settled
the
question
of
whether
I’ll
go
back
home.我是否回家还没有定。

Topic2
I
like
pop
music
一.
重点词汇
pity遗憾
concert
音乐会

violin
小提琴
sweet
悦耳的
continue
doing
sth.
继续做某事

be
born
出生

set
up
建立
classical
music
古典音乐
folk
songs
民歌stage
name
艺名
everyday
life
日常生活

be
famous
for
因……而著名look
for
寻找二.
重点句型
1．And
it
sounds
great!
(Page
61)
听起来好极了。
sound
系动词“听起来”，系动词后常与形容词连用。
2.What
kind
of
musical
instrument
can
you
play?
(Page
62)你会弹什么种类的乐器？
kind
是“种类，类型”的意思。如：
a
kind
of
一种，all
kinds
of各种各样，
what
kind
of
什么类型的。如:
1）Dumpling
is
a
kind
of
Chinese
food.饺子是一种中国食品。
2）There
are
all
kinds
of
books
in
Beijing
Library.北京图书馆有各种各样的图书。
3）What
kind
of
room
would
you
like,
a
double
room
or
a
single
room?
你需要什么类型的房间？双人间还是单人间？
3.We
have
guitar,
violin,
piano
and
drum
lessons
for
just
￥240
each.
(Page
62)

我们有吉他课、小提琴课、钢琴课、和打鼓课，每个课程仅需要240元。
each副词
“各个”，“每个”。如：
1）These
books
cost
a
dollar
each.这些书每本一美元。
2)He
gave
the
boys
a
shilling
each.他给孩子们每人一个先令。
4．What
do
you
do
in
your
free
time?
(Page
63)
你在闲暇之际干些什么？
in
one’s
free
time
“在闲暇之际”。
5．Classical
music
is
serious
music.
(Page
64)
古典音乐是一种很严肃的音乐。
serious
形容词“严肃的、认真的”；“严重的”。如：
1）He
is
a
serious
worker.
他是一个工作认真的人。
2）“
It’s
nothing
serious.”
says
the
doctor,“
You’ve
got
a
little
cold.”
医生说：“没事，就是有点儿感冒。”
6．Pop
music
often
comes
and
goes
easily.
(Page
64)
流行音乐来得快去得也快。
come
and
go
easily
可以翻译为“来去匆匆”。如：
1）Money
is
something
that
comes
and
goes
easily.钱这东西来得快去得也快。
2）Rain
in
June
comes
and
goes
easily.六月的雨来得快去得也快。
7．They
are
very
popular
among
young
people.
(Page
64)它们在年轻人当中很流行。
among
介词“在……当中”,“在……中间”，用于三者或三者以上；而between也是介词“在……当中”,“在……中间”之意，则只能用于两者之间。如：
1）Among
the
family,
Lin
Tao
is
the
youngest.在全家人中，林涛是最小的。
2）Tom
runs
fastest
among
the
boys
in
his
class.
汤姆是他们班男孩子中跑得最快的。
3）Mary
is
sitting
between
the
twins.玛丽坐在双胞胎的中间。
4）The
football
game
is
between
Chinese
team
and
Japanese
team.
足球赛在中国队和日本队之间进行。
8.
Guo
Lanying,
Song
Zuying
and
Tenger
are
famous
for
their
folk
songs.
(Page
64)
郭兰英，宋祖英和腾格尔以（唱）民歌而出名。
be
famous
for“以……而著名”,
“因……而出名”。如：
1)
Gui
Lin
is
famous
for
the
stone
forests.桂林以石林而著名。
2)China
is
famous
for
its
long
history.中国以悠久的历史而闻名。
3）Beijing
Library
is
famous
for
having
a
large
number
of
books.
北京图书馆以藏书众多而闻名。
9．It
is
one
of
the
most
famous
rock
bands
in
the
world.
(Page
65)
它是世界上最著名的摇滚乐队之一。
one
of
“……之一”。常用在“one
of
+
最高级
+名词复数”结构中。如：
1)Changjiang
River
is
one
of
the
longest
rivers
in
the
world.
长江是世界上最长的河流之一。
2)
English
is
one
of
the
most
difficult
subjects
this
term.
英语是这学期最难学的课程之一。
3）Liu
Xiang
is
one
of
the
fastest
runners
in
the
world.
刘翔是世界上跑得最快的人之一。
10．In
the
fall
of
1976,
a-
14-year-old
high
school
student,
Larry
Mullen,
looked
for
some
musicians.
在1976年的秋天，一个14岁的中学生，Larry
Mullen寻找一些音乐家。
1)fall是美国英语，相当于英国英语的中的autumn。
2)14-year-old
数词和名词之间有连字符的，名词不用复数。如：
a
three-leg
chair
一把三条腿的椅子
the
tenth
five-year
plan
第十个五年计划
3)look
for
“寻找”，强调“寻找”的过程，而find“找到”，则是强调“找到”的结果。如：
1)—What
are
you
doing?
你在干什么？
—
I’m
looking
for
my
bike
key.我在找我的自行车钥匙。
2)—What
are
you
looking
for?你在找什么？
—I’m
looking
for
my
cat.我在找我的猫。
—Can
you
find
it?你找到了没有？
—No.
I
looked
for
it
everywhere,
but
I
can’t
find
it
anywhere.
没有。我到处找，可哪儿也找不到。
11．He
wanted
to
form
a
band.
(Page
65)他想组建一个乐队。
want
to
“想做某事”，want
to
+
动词原形。如：
1)
I
want
to
be
a
doctor
when
I
grow
up.我长大了想当一名医生。
2)
People
want
to
live
on
the
moon
some
day.人们想有一天能住在月球上。
3)
What
do
you
want
to
do
this
Sunday?这个星期天你想干什么？
常用want
sb.
to
do
sth.表示“想让某人做某事”。如：
1)He
wants
me
to
help
him
with
his
lessons.他想让我帮他学习功课。
2)
His
parents
wanted
him
to
clean
the
room
after
school.
他父母想让他放学后打扫房间。
3)
The
teacher
wanted
her
to
speak
louder
when
she
answered
the
question.
老师想让她在回答问题的时候声音再大一点。
12．He
found
3
boys
and
they
set
up
a
band.
(Page
65)
他找到了3个男孩，他们就组成了一个乐队。
found是动词find的过去式。意思是“找到”；find强调“找到”的结果。见相关语言知识材料中注释41。
set
up
组建，创办。如：set
up
housekeeping组织家庭
13.The
four
members
are
still
close
friends
after
many
years.
(Page
65)
多年后，4位成员仍然是好朋友。
close
“亲密的”。如：
a
close
friend一个亲密的朋友14.They
continue
making
music.
(Page
65)他们继续创作音乐。
continue
+
to
do
sth./
doing
sth./
n.“继续做某事”。如：
continue
to
read/writing/
a
story
继续阅读/写作/一个故事

15．And
people
all
over
the
world
still
enjoy
their
music
very
much.
(Page
65)
全世界的人们仍然非常喜欢他们的音乐。
all
over
the
world
全世界
16．When
he
was
eight,
his
father
asked
a
music
teacher
to
teach
him
to
play
the
piano.

(Page
67)当他八岁的时候，他的父亲请了一位老师来教授他如何弹奏钢琴。
在这个句子中ask的意思是“请求，要求”，常用的ask
sb.
to
do
sth.“让某人做某事”。如：
1）I
often
ask
my
uncle
to
help
me
with
my
maths.我常请我叔叔帮我学数学。
2）My
grandfather
always
asks
me
to
get
up
at
six
in
the
morning.
我爷爷总让我早晨六点起床。
还有一些其他类似的用法。如：
tell
sb.
to
do
sth.
告诉某人做某事
want
sb.
to
do
sth.想让某人做某事
teach
sb.
to
do
sth.教某人做某事
play
the
piano
“弹奏钢琴”。在英语中，在表示弹奏、演奏乐器时，所有的乐器前面都要加定冠词the，如：
play
the
guitar弹吉他
play
the
piano弹钢琴
play
the
violin拉小提琴
play
the
drums
敲鼓
而与之相反，在英语中表达玩球类项目时，我们通常在球类项目的名词前不加定冠词。如：
play
football踢足球
play
basketball打篮球
play
bridge
cards打桥牌
play
chess下棋
17．He
says
violin
music
is
his
favorite
and
it
makes
him
happy.
(Page
67)
他说小提琴是他的最爱，使他很快乐。
make
+n.+adj.结构。如：
The
news
made
us
very
exciting.
这个消息使我们很激动。三.语法学习1.
What
a
pity!
(Page
61)真遗憾！
这是一个由what引导的感叹句。what引导感叹句的基本构成为：
what
+
a
/
an
+（形容词）+可数名词单数！
what
+（形容词）+可数名词复数/不可数名词！如：
1）What
a
stupid
question!多么愚蠢的问题啊！
2）What
lively
boys
they
are!
多么活泼的男孩子们啊
2.
What
are
you
going
to
do
this
Sunday
evening?(Page61)
这一周日晚上你想干什么1)“be
going
to”
是一般将来时的一种表达方法.它表示:

i)
现在打算在最近或将来要做某事.
如:
Tom
is
going
to
Beijing
with
his
father
next
week.
ii)
说话人根据已有的迹象认为可能要发生某事.
如:
There
are
a
lot
of
dark
clouds.
It’s
going
to
rain.
2)
“be
going
to”句式的基本结构:
肯定句:主语+be
going
to
…

eg.
He
is
going
to
stay
at
school.
否定句:主语+be
+
not
+going
to…
eg.
I’m
not
going
to
the
library
this
afternoon.
一般疑问句:
Be
+主语+going
to…
eg.
Are
you
going
to
play
tennis
next
week?
3)be
going
to
用于there
be
结构时要用There
be
going
to
be
+
主语+其它形式.如:
There
is
going
to
be
a
football
game
tomorrow.
4)与be
going
to
连用的时间状语有:
next
week/month/year,
tomorrow,
the
day
after
tomorrow,
this
evening,
in
the
future等.
Topic3
The
movie
is
so
wonderful!一.
重点词汇
pleasant令人愉快的

handsome英俊的agree
with
sb.
与某人看法一致take
a
shower洗澡
answer
the
phone
接电话
do
some
cleaning
打扫卫生
knock
at
敲

too…to太…..以至于不能
talk
about谈论关于二.重点句型
1．I
called
you
but
nobody
answered
the
phone.
(Page
69)

我给你打电话了，但是没有人接。
answer
the
phone
固定词组，可翻译为“接电话”
answer的意思是“回答，答复”。如：
1)
What
shall
I
answer?我将怎样回答呢？
2)
Have
you
answered
his
letter?
你回了他的信吗？
3)
Answer
the
door,
please,
Jack.
Someone
is
knocking
at
the
door.
开门去，杰克,有人在敲门。2．Oh,
I
was
taking
a
shower.
(Page
69)
我在淋浴。
take
a
shower淋浴，也可以用动词have代替take。如：
洗澡
take
a
bath
have
a
bath
休息一下take
a
resthave
a
rest
看一看take
a
lookhave
a
look
散散步take
a
walkhave
a
walk
3．Yeah,
I
think
so.
(Page
71)是，我也这样认为。
在think后面可以用so来代替前面的内容，以避免重复。例如：
—
Is
he
at
home?
他在家吗？
—
Yes,
I
think
so.
是的，我想他在家。
I
think
so.的否定形式一般为I
don’t
think
so.例如：
—Do
you
think
classical
music
is
very
popular
in
China?
你认为古典音乐在中国很流行吗？
—No,
I
don’t
think
so.
不，我认为不很流行。4．And
I
also
like
the
young
man
with
light
hair.
(Page
71)

我也喜欢那个留着浅色头发的年轻人。
with在这里是“有”的意思。如：
a
coat
with
two
pockets有两个口袋的衣服
a
girl
with
blue
eyes碧眼女郎
a
woman
with
an
angry
look
in
her
eyes眼里有怒色的女子5．He
is
so
handsome!
(Page
71)他非常帅！
so在口语中，与加重语气的感叹句连用，作very解。如：
1)
I’m
so
glad
to
see
you!我很高兴见到你！
2)
It
was
so
kind
of
you
!你真好！
3)
There
was
so
much
to
do!这么多事要做！6．I
agree
with
you.
(Page
71)我同意你的意见。
agree
with
sb.同意某人的看法。如：
I
don’t
agree
with
her.
我不同意她的意见。7.
You
look
very
sad.
(Page72)
你看起来很伤心。
look系动词，可以翻译为“看起来”。look做系动词，后面可以接形容词、动词的过去分词、名词、介词短语以及as
if从句做表语。如：
1）Tom
looks
very
strong.
汤姆看起来非常的强壮。（形容词做表语）
2）Amy
looks
a
fool.
埃米看起来像一个傻瓜。（名词做表语）
3）You
look
like
your
mother.
你看起来很像你的母亲。（介词短语做表语）
4）It
looks
as
if
we’re
going
to
win
this
game.
看起来似乎我们要赢得这场比赛。（从句做表语）8.There’s
nothing
serious.
(Page
72)没什么严重的事。（没事。）
nothing
serious
“没事”。注意此结构的用法。用来修饰代词something,
anything,
nothing,
somebody,
anybody,
nobody等的形容词，要放在被修饰词的后面。如句中serious要放在nothing的后面。如：
1)
Would
you
like
anything
else?你还要点儿什么吗？
2)
I’ll
tell
you
something
important.我要告诉你一件重要的事。
3)
There
is
nothing
wrong
with
the
computer.这台电脑没毛病。
8．Well,
Miss
Wang
was
angry
with
me.
(Page
72)王老师生我的气了。
注意be
angry
后所跟的介词：
be
angry
with
+
sb.
生某人的气
be
angry
at
+
sb.
对某人的言行气愤
be
angry
about
+
sth.
对某事生气
如：
1)
He
was
angry
with
himself
for
having
made
such
foolish
mistakes.
他因犯如此愚蠢的错误而气恼自己。
2)
He
was
angry
at
being
kept
waiting.他因旁人使他久等而生气。
3)
He
was
angry
about
so
much
traffic
in
the
street.
他对街上那么多的车辆而气恼。
9.In
the
early
1800s,
Sunday
was
the
“holy
day”.
(Page
73)

在19世纪早期，星期日的含义就是“神圣的一天”。
1800s表示19世纪，同样的，1900s则表示20世纪。10.In
the
US,
workers
called
them“blue
Mondays”.(Page
73)
在美国，工人们把它们叫做“蓝色星期一”。
蓝色（blue）在汉语中的引申意义较少，而在英语中blue是一个含义十分丰富的颜色词。在翻译同这一颜色有关的表达时，我们应该注意其中的特别含义。
英语的blue常用来喻指人的“情绪低落”、“心情沮丧”、“忧愁若闷”，如：
1）They
felt
rather
blue
after
the
failure
in
the
football
game.
球赛踢输了，他们感到有些沮丧。
2）—She
looks
blue
today.What’s
the
matter
with
her?
—She’s
in
holiday
blue.
—她今天显得闷闷不乐，出了什么事？
—她得了假期忧郁症。
11.
Then
decide
how
you
are
going
to
spend
your
weekend.
(Page
74)
然后决定你的周末怎么过。
spend度过；花费（时间、金钱）。结构有：spend...on
sth.,
spend...(in)doing
sth.
如：
1）He
spent
5
yuan
on
the
post
card.
他买这张明信片花了5元钱。
2)They
spent
three
days
looking
for
the
lost
sheep
on
the
hill.

他们用了三天的时间在山上找丢失的羊。12.
Did
you
have
a
good
time?
(Page
76)
你们玩得高兴吗？
have
a
good
time
=
enjoy
oneself过得愉快；玩得高兴。类似的说法还有have
a
great
time,
have
a
nice
time,
have
a
wonderful
time。三.语法学习
I
was
doing
some
washing.
I
was
doing
some
cleaning.
(Page
69)
我在洗衣服。
我在打扫卫生。这句用的是过去进行时.
1.
过去进行时表示过去某一时刻正在进行或发生的动作,也表示过去一段时间内的活动或那个阶段正在进行的动作.如:

He
were
watching
TV
at
8:00
last
night.

They
were
writing
a
book
last
month.
3.
过去进行时由be
(was/were)+动词ing
形式构成的,
肯定句:主语+was/were
+doing
+…
否定句:
主语+wasn’t/weren’t
+doing
+…
一般疑问句:
Was/Were+主语+doing+…
肯定回答:Yes,
主语+was/were.
否定回答:No,
主语+wasn’t/weren’t.
如:
They
were
studying
English
at
this
tine
yesterday.
They
weren’t
studying
English
at
this
time
yesterday.
Were
they
studying
English
at
this
time
yesterday?
Yes,
they
were.
/
No,
they
weren’t.Unit
4
Our
WorldTopic1
we
share
the
world
with
plants
and
animals
一.重点词语
1.
share…with
与……共享
2.
play
with
玩弄，玩耍
3.
in
danger
在危险之中
4.
feed
on
以……为食
5.
think
about
考虑，思考
6.
enjoy
nature
享受自然
7.
at
night
晚上
8.
in
the
daytime
白天
9.
summer
vacation
暑假
10.
thousands
of
成千上万
11.
in
fact
事实上
12.
find
out
查明，发现
13.
in
nature
在自然界
二.重点句型
１.Ｐlants
are
more
beautiful
than
animals.　植物比动物更漂亮。
２.The
plants
stay
green
longer
there.　那儿的植物能更长时间保持绿色。
３.The
rainforests
are
very
important
to
us.　（热带）雨林对我们很重要。
４.Water
is
necessary
for
all
plants.It
is
the
most
important
thing
to
all
living
things,we
must
save
every
drop
of
water.　水对所有植物是必需的。它对所有生物都重要，我们必须节约每一滴水。
５.Isn’t
it
interesting？　是不是很有趣呀？
６.It
is
one
of
the
most
dangerous
fish
in
the
world.　它是世界上最危险的鱼之一。
７.It
is
so
strange！　太奇怪了！
三.语法学习
（一.）形容词的比较级和最高级的构成
１.
规则变化：
（1.）一般在词尾加—er或—est.如：fresh—fresher—freshest.
（2.）以字母e结尾的形容词，加r或st,如：late—later—latest.
（3.）以重读闭音节结尾的词，词尾只有一个辅音字母时，应双写这一辅音字母，再加er或est.如：big—bigger—biggest.
（4.）以辅音字母＋y结尾的双音节词，先改y为i，再加er
或est.如：happy—happier—happiest.
（5.）部分双音节词和多音节词前面加more或most构成比较级或最高级。如：careful—more
careful—most
careful,beautiful—more
beautiful—most
beautiful.
２.不规则变化：
good/well—better—best,little—less—least,many/much—more—most,bad/ill—worse—worst,far—farther/further—farthest/furthest.
（二.）形容词的比较级和最高级的用法
１.
比较级Ａ＜Ｂ或Ａ＞Ｂ，经常与than搭配，或给出比较的二个内容。可用much和a
little修饰．
２.
三者或三者以上比较用最高级，一般给出比较范围．如：of（in）＋…。
(1)例句：①I’m
happier
than
you.　我比你更快乐。
②Plants
are
much
more
beautiful
than
animals.　植物比动物漂亮的多。　　
(２)例句：①The
boy
is
the
tallest
in
my
class.　这个男孩是我们班最高的。
②Lesson
Two
is
the
most
important
of
all.　第二课是所有中最重要的。　
四.交际用语：学习如何用英语描述和谈论我们生存的自然环境
Do
you
like
plants
or
animals?
What
are
you
thinking
about?

Why
do
you
think
so?
What
kind
of
wild
animal
is
the
most
dangerous,the
tiger,the
snake
or
the
bear?
Why
must
we
save
every
drop
of
water?
Topic
2
What
can
robots
do
for
us?
一.
重点词语
1.take
the
place
of
代替，取代
2.instead
of
代替，而不是……
3.mistake…for…把……错当
4.seem
to
do
好像，似乎
5.call
for
要求
6.wake
sb.
up
将某人叫醒
7.see
sb.doing
sth.
看见某人正在做某事
8.use
sth.
for
sth./doing
sth.
利用某物做某事
9.spend…on…
在……上花费时间或金钱
10.be
sure
of
确信
11.these
days
现在，目前
12.in
alphabetical
order
按字母表顺序排列
13.look
up
查阅
14.pay
attention
to
注意，专心
15.begin
with
以……开始
16.and
son
on
等等
17.switch
on
开（电灯，机器等）
18.ask
（sb.）for
sth.
向……要……
二．重点句型
1.
I’m
sure
robots
can
do
some
work
better
than
humans.
我确信机器人比人能更好地做某些工作。
2.
I
saw
a
UFO
while
I
was
walking
down
the
street
yesterday.
昨天我沿着街道走时，看见了一个不明飞行物。
3.
It
looked
like
a
plate.
它看上去像一个盘子。
4.
Until
now,even
the
scientists
are
not
sure
whether
there
are
UFO.
直到现在，甚至科学家也不确信是否有不明飞行物。
5.
We
can
shop
without
going
out
of
our
houses.
我们不出家门就能购物。
6.
We
can
use
the
Internet
for
finding
a
job.
我们可以用网络来找工作。
7.
We
shouldn’t
spend
too
much
time
on
it.但是我们不应该在因特网上面花费太多的时间。
8.
When
you
look
up
a
word
in
the
dictionary,pay
attention
to
the
first
letter
of
the
word.
当你在字典里查一个单词的时候，注意这个单词的第一个字母。
三.语法学习
（一.）现在进行时与过去进行时的区别：
１.现在进行时表示现在正在发生或正在做的事情，基本结构be＋现在分词。如：
肯定句：The
robots
are
making
a
car
now.
这些机器人正在生产小汽车。
否定句：We
are
not
studying
on
the
Internet.
我们没有在互联网上学习。
疑问句：Is
the
teacher
looking
up
the
word
in
the
dictionary？这个老师正在词典中查这个词吗？
特殊疑问句：Ｗho
am
I
talking
to？我在和谁谈话？　
２.过去进行时表示过去某一时间，正在发生或正在做的事情。基本结构was（were）＋现在分词。
肯定句：Ｗhen
he
came
in,I
was
writing
a
letter.当他进来时，我在写一封信。
否定句：They
weren’t
watching
TV
while
she
was
reading.　她读书时，他们没在看电视。
疑问句：Was
the
UFO
flying
to
us
at
8
last
night
?昨晚８点UFO向我们飞来了吗？
特殊疑问句：What
were
you
drinking
while
we
were
sleeping?我们睡觉时，你们在喝什么？
进行时态往往用在时间状语从句中，常与when,while等连词搭配。
（二.）be
sure结构表示肯定和不肯定。be
sure一般用来表示肯定，be
not
sure（whether/if）表示不肯定。
be
sure后面可以跟不定式和宾语从句。跟不定式一般译为“一定……”，跟宾语从句，译为“确信……”。
如：
We
are
sure
to
repair
the
TV
well.
我们一定修好这台电视机。
I’m
sure
you
can
finish
your
work.
我确信你能完成你的工作。
Are
you
sure
whether（if）he
switched
the
computer
on?
你确信他打开还是没有打开电脑？
四.交际用语：学习用英语谈论现代科技。
Could
you
tell
me
something
about
robots?
Can
robots
take
the
place
of
humans?
Are
you
sure
there
are
UFOs?
Yes,I’m
sure.
No,I’m
sure
whether/if
there
are
UFOs.
What
do
you
often
do
on
the
Internet?Topic
3
There
are
many
old
city
walls
in
Beijing,aren’t
there?一.
重点词语
1.
more
than
超过
2.pull
down
推倒，拆毁
3.heavy
traffic
交通繁忙
4.wear
out
磨损，用坏

5.used
to
do
sth.
过去常常做某事
6.do
one’s
best
尽（某人）最大努力
7.live
models
真人模型
8.the
ancient
world
古代
9.be
made
up
of
由……组成
10.join…together
把……连在一起
11.regard…as…
把……看作
12.be
worn
out
被损坏
二.
重点句型
1.Lots
of
them
were
pulled
down
in
the
1960s.
他们当中许多在二十世纪六十年代被拆毁。
2.People
thought
them
useless.
人们认为它们没有用。
3.It’s
really
too
bad.
这太遗憾了。
4.We
are
doing
our
best
to
protect
and
rebuild
the
old
city
walls.
我们正在尽全力保护并重建老城墙。
5.It
is
one
of
the“seven
wonders”of
the
ancient
world
still
standing.
它是现存的古代“七大奇迹”之一。
6.It
took
100,000
people
over
20
years
to
build
it.
修建它花了10万人二十多年的时间。
7.Since
then,
people
regarded
the
Great
Wall
as
a
symbol
of
the
Chinese
nation.
从那以后，人们就把长城看作是中华民族的象征。
8.Every
year
many
people
find
great
pleasure
visiting
the
wall.每年有许多人参观长城，从中得到极大乐趣。
三.
语法学习
反意疑问句：由陈述句（或祈使句、感叹句）加一个简短问句构成的疑问句叫反意疑问
句。实质是前面陈述句的反问句。
一般对应规律：前肯后否；前否后肯。即陈述部分为肯定形式，附加问句用否定形式；陈述部分为否定形式，附加问句用肯定形式。如：
There
are
many
pyramids
in
Egypt,
aren’t
there?在埃及有许多金字塔，不是吗？
Sally
visited
the
Great
Wall
last
month,didn’t
she?萨莉上个月参观了长城，不是吗？
He
doesn’t
realize
the
importance
of
saving
water,
does
he?他没有意识到节约用水的重要性，是吗？
特例点拨：①I’m
your
good
friend,
aren’t
I?我是你的好朋友，不是吗？I
don’t
think
you
can
rebuild
the
house,
can
you?我认为你不能重修这座房子，是吗？（I
don’t
think…主要在说think后的内容，故按从句变化）。
②陈述部分有nobody,
nothing,
never,
no,
few（没几个），little（几乎没有），hardly（几乎不）等否定或半否定词时，仍视为否定句。根据反意疑问句对应规律，疑问部分用肯定形式。如：There
is
nothing
in
the
room,is
there?屋子里什么也没有，是吗？

Maria
never
supports
me,
does
she?
玛丽亚从未支持过我，是吗？

He
had
few
apples,
did
he?
他几乎没有苹果，是吗？
③祈使句的反意疑问句：无论肯定或否定，通常在祈使句后加上will
you?如：

Please
close
the
door,
will
you?请关门好吗？

Don’t
tear
down
the
old
walls,
will
you?不要拆毁古墙，好吗？

但以Let’s开头的祈使句用shall
we?如：

let’s
make
a
survey,
shall
we?我们做个调查，好吗？
四.
交际用语：学习用英语描述和谈论中外名胜古迹。
How
many
great
wonders
of
the
world
do
you
know?
I
know
some
wonders.
Do
you
know
these
places
of
interest?
What
is
it?
Where
is
it?
Why
is
it
famous?
Do
you
know
any
more
information
about
it?

仁爱英语八年级下知识点归纳
Unit
5
Feeling
Happy

Topic
1
Why
all
the
smiling
faces?
一.
重点词汇：
（一）反义词

happy----unhappy/
sad
lucky----unluckypoor----rich
kind----cruel
popular----unpopularsmart----stupid/
sillyinteresting----boring
（二）表示情感的形容词
excited感到兴奋的surprised
吃惊的
happy
快乐的unhappy/
sad
伤心的

angry
/
mad
生气的worried
担心的

afraid/
frightened
害怕的

disappointed
失望的

proud
自豪的

lonely
孤单的nervous
紧张不安的
interested
感到有趣的
（三）
重点词组
1.
one
of
my
favorite
movies

我最喜欢的电影之一
2.
spend
the
evening
过夜
3.
say
thanks
/
goodbye/
hello
to
sb.

向某人道谢/道别/问好
4.
tell
a
short
story讲一个小故事
5.
a
ticket
to…

一张…的票
6.
wish
to
do
sth.
希望做某事
7.
get
enough
sleep

得到足够的睡眠
8.
win
a
medal

获得一枚奖牌
9.
feel
proud/
lonely

感到自豪/孤单
10.
set
a
table
for…为……摆餐具
11.
have
a
temperature
=
have
a
fever
发烧
12.
be
able
to
do
sth.

有能力做某事
13.
ring
up

给……打电话
14.
care
for=
look
after/
take
care
of

照顾
15.
because
of由于
16.
cheer
up
/
cheer
on使……振奋、高兴起来
/
为
……喝彩、加油
17.
play
the
role
of
sb.
扮演某人的角色
18.
be
on
上演;
放映
19.
at
first首先
20.
fall
into
落入
21.
be
afraid
of
doing
sth.

害怕做某事
22.
in
the
end
=
at
last最后
23.
go
mad

发疯
24.
come
into
being形成
25.
be
full
of
充满…
26.
be
popular
with…
受……喜爱
27.
make
peace
with
sb.
同……讲和
28.
end/begin
with…

以……结尾/开始
二.
重点句型及重点语言点
1.
How
nice!
真是太好了!What
a
shame!
真可惜!
＝That’s
too
bad!What
bad
news!
多糟的消息!这三句全都是感叹句.它们的结构为:
1)
How
+
adj./
adv.
+
主语
+
谓语!
如:
How
moving
the
movie
is!
How
fast
the
boy
runs!
2)
What
+
a/an
+
adj.
+
n.
(可数名词的单数)
+
主语
+
谓语!
如:
What
a
big
apple
(it
is)!
3)
What
+
adj.
+
n.(可数名词的复数或不可数名词)
+
主语
+
谓语!
如:

What
interesting
stories
(they
are)!What
hard
work(
it
is)!
2.
Because
he
can’t
get
a
ticket
to
The
Sound
of
Music.
因为他没有买到《音乐之声》的票.
to
表“的”，常见的搭配如下：
a
ticket
to
The
Sound
of
Music

一张《音乐之声》的票
the
answer
to
the
question

问题的答案
the
key
to
the
door
门的钥匙
the
way
to…去…..的路
3.
I
think
Mr.
Lee
likes
it
very
much
and
really
wishes
to
watch
it.
我认为李老师非常喜欢它而且的确想去看.wish/
hope
to
do
sth.希望做某事

与
wish
相关的结构还有:
wish/
hope
+
that引导的从句;
如:I
wish/
hope
(that)
we
will
win.
我们可以说wish
sb.
to
do
sth.
而不能说hope
sb.
to
do
sth.;

4.
I’ll
ring
up
Michael
later.
稍后我打电话给迈克.ring
up
sb.
=
call/
ring/
phone
sb.
=
give
sb.
a
ring/
call/
telephone
=
make
a
telephone
to
sb.当宾语为代词时,
只能放中间.如:
ring
me/him/her
up
5.…since
they
were
not
able
to
go.
……既然他们不能去.

can与be
able
to
二者都表“能；会”，在指“一般能力”时，常互换。如：
He
can/is
able
to
work
out
the
problem.
他能算出这道难题.

区别:
can
只有现在式和过去式(could),没有数的变化;而be
able
to
有时态及数的变化.
如:
I/
She
couldn’t
swim
three
years
ago,
but
now
I
/
She
can
.

三年前,我/她
不会游泳,
但现在我/她能.

I
will
be
able
to
see
him
next
week.
下周,
我将会看到他.
They
were
/He
was
able
to
climb
the
mountain,
but
now
they
aren’t/
He
wasn’t.
They’re
/
He
was
too
old.
他们/他过去能爬得上这座山,
但现在不能.
他们/他太老了.
6.
I’m
sure
Mr.
Lee
will
be
surprised
and
happy!
我确信李老师会很惊奇也很高兴!be
surprised
“感到惊奇的”,
主语一般为人.be
surprising
“令人惊奇的”,
主语一般为物.类似的有：interested/
interesting;
excited/
exciting;
bored/
boring

7.
The
lonely
father
often
became
angry
because
of
the
noisy
children.
孤独的父亲经常由于吵吵闹闹的的孩子们而发怒了。because
of
“由于”，是介词短语，后常跟名词或短语。如：He
didn’t
come
to
school
because
of
his
illness./
because
he
was
ill.

由于他的病，他没来上学。We
didn’t
go
there
because
of
the
heavy
rain./
because
it
rained
heavily.
由于大雨，我们没去那儿。
8.
Maria
was
able
to
cheer
up
the
family
by
teaching
them
to
sing
lively
songs…
玛丽亚有能力通过教他们唱轻快的歌曲使整个家庭振作起来。
by
是介词，指“通过（某种方式）”，后面跟名词、代词、形容词或动名词。
9.
What
did
Maria
go
to
the
Von
Trapp
family
for?
=
Why
did
Maria
go
to
the
Von
Trapp?
玛丽亚为了什么目的去冯特拉普家庭？
10.
…
and
the
mother
was
so
worried
that
she
looked
for
him
everywhere,
…
这位母亲是如此焦急，以至于他四处寻找他。
so
+
adj/
adv.
+
that
+
句子

指“如此…以致于”
三.
重点语法1．系表结构：Linking
verb.
+
adj.

常见的连系动词如下:
1）be
动词：He
is
helpful.

They
are
tired.
2)
表
“…起来”：look看起来;
sound听起来;
taste尝起来;feel摸起来等等.如:
3）表状态变化的连系动词有：get
变得;
turn
转变;
go变;
become变成
等等.
如:In
summer,
the
days
get
longer,
the
weather
gets
warmer.In
fall,
the
leaves
turn
yellow.The
mother
went
mad.
He
became
angry.
2．because
引导的原因状语从句:
because
用来回答why提问的问句,表示的原因语气很强,一般用在主句后面,强调因果关系.Mr.
Wang
looks
tired
because
he
worked
late
last
night
and
didn’t
get
enough
sleep.Kangkang
is
disappointed
because
his
best
friend
is
not
able
to
come.----Why
do
they
feel
proud?----Because
a
player
from
their
country
won
a
medal.Topic
2

Why
is
Beth
crying?
一、重点词汇：
（一）词形转换：1.badly(反义词)well
2.shy(最高级)shyest

3.understand(过去式)understood4.anxious(同义词)worried
5.satisfaction(形容词)satisfied
6.surprise(形容词)surprised

7.suggestion(动词)suggest
8.stranger(形容词)strange

9.advice(同义词)suggestion10.either(同义词)too
11.humorous(名词)humor
12.sad(名词)sadness

13.unfair(反义词)fair
14.hit(过去式)hit

（二）重点词组:
(
1
)
“be
+
形容词+
介词”
的结构:
be
worried
about对……感到担心/
焦虑
be
anxious
about对……感到焦虑
be
glad
about

对……高兴
be
nervous
about对……紧张
be
strict
with
sb.对某人严格
be
strict
in
/
about
sth.对某事严格
be
patient
with
对……耐心
be
pleased
/
satisfied
with
对……满意
be
bored
with

对……烦闷
be
popular
with
受……欢迎
be
angry
with/at
sb.
对某人生气
be
angry
at/
about
sth.对某事生气
be
surprised
at
对……惊奇
be
mad
at
对……气愤
be
excited
at对……兴奋
be
interested
in
对……有兴趣
be
tired
of
对……疲倦
be
afraid
of
对……害怕
(
2
)
课文词组:
1.
do
badly
in

在某方面表现很差
2.
talk
with
sb.
=
have
a
talk
with
sb.与某人谈一谈
3.
over
and
over
again反复地;
一再
4.
wait
in
line

排队等候
5.
fall
behind落后
6.
get
sb.
to
do
sth.

让某人做某事
7.
at
one’s
age

在某人的年龄时
8.
try
to
eat
less
high-energy
food

少吃高能量的食品
9.
calm
down

冷静;
镇静
10.
have
bad
experiences

有不好的经历
11.
give…a
hand
帮助
12.
in
one’s
teens
在某人十几岁时（13-19岁）
13.
happen
to
sb.
发生
14.
move
to
spl.

搬到某处
15.
get
used
to
(doing)
sth.
习惯于(做)某事
16.
be
/
make
friends
with

与……交朋友
17.
join
in参加(活动)
18.
fit
in
被他人接受;相处融洽
19.
deal
with
处理;
处置
20.
fail
to
pass
an
exam
=
fail
an
exam
考试不及格
21.
lose
a
friend
or
relative

失去一个朋友或亲戚
22.
refuse
to
do
sth.拒绝做某事
23.
argue
with
sb.
与某人争论
24.
have
a
normal
life

过正常的生活
二、重点句型及重点语言点
1.
Anything
wrong?
=
Is
there
anything
wrong?
有什么麻烦吗?
形容词修饰不定代词要后置.
如:
something
bad
不好的事情
everything
new
一切新的事物
2.
What
seems
to
be
the
problem?
似乎有什么问题?
seem
to
do
sth.
“似乎做某事”
常与
“It
seems
that
+
句子”
转换,
如:
He
seems
to
know
her
name.
=
It
seems
that
he
knows
her
name.
似乎他知道她的名字.
seem
+
adj
“似乎(怎样)”,
构成系表结构.
如:
You
seem
sad.
=
You
seem
(to
be)
sad.=
It
seems
that
you
are
sad.你似乎很伤心.
3.
What
is
the
teacher
like?
那个老师是什么样的人?
What’s
sb.
like?
常询问人的内在品质或性恪.
如:
--What’s
Beth
like?

--
She
is
shy
and
quiet.
What
does
sb.
look
like?
常询问人的长相.
如:
--What’s
Beth
look
like
?
--
She
is
nice
with
big
eyes.
be
like
与look
like
常可以互换,
如:
He
looks
like
his
mother.
=
He
is
like
his
mother.
他看起来像他的父亲.
4.
It
is
important
to
talk
to
someone
else.
跟其它人交流很重要.
句型
“It
is
+
adj.
+
to
do”中,
“It”是形式主语,真正主语是后面的动词不定式.
如:
It
is
normal
to
feel
tired
after
a
long
trip.长途旅行后,感到疲劳是正常的.
It
is
dangerous
to
swim
in
the
sea.
在大海里游泳是很危险的.
5.
…,
but
I
don’t
know
how
to
get
other
students
to
talk
with
me.
但是我不知道怎样使他们和我交谈.
get
sb.
to
do
sth.
“使(让/
叫)
某人做某事”,
相当于
ask
/
tell
sb.
to
do
sth.或者说
let
/
make
sb.
do
sth.
6.
It
usually
takes
me
a
long
time
to
become
happy
again.
通常要花我很长时间才能重新快乐起来.
句型
“It
takes
sb.
some
time
to
do
sth.”
花了某人某时做某事.
如:
It
took
me
three
days
to
finish
this
work.
花了我三天时间完成这项工作.
7.
It
is
said
that…
据说……
8.
...
when
something
bad
happens
to
us.
当不好的事情发生在我们身上时.
“sth.
happens
to
sb.”,
指“某事发生在某人身上”.
是一种惯用句型.
如:
A
serious
accident
happened
to
his
brother
yesterday.

昨天,一个重大事故发生在他的兄弟身上.
happen
to
do
sth.
指
“碰巧做某事”,
如:
I
happened
to
see
my
friend
Jim
in
the
street
yesterday.
昨天,我碰巧在街上看到我的朋友吉姆.
9.
How
time
flies!
“光阴似箭!”
是
How
quickly
the
time
flies!
简略句.
10.
I
have
to
get
used
to
everything
new.
我不得不去适应一切新的事物.
get
/
be
used
to
(doing)
sth.
“习惯于(做)某事”.
其中是介词.
如:
He
can’t
get
used
to
the
weather
here.
他不习惯这儿的天气.
I
am
used
to
getting
up
early.
我习惯于早起.
used
to
do
sth.
指
“过去常做某事”,
如:
He
used
to
listen
to
the
pop
songs,
but
now
he
listens
to
the
folk
songs.
他过去常听通俗歌曲,但现在他听民歌.
11.
I
try
to
join
in
activities
of
many
kinds.
我尽量参加各式各样的活动.
join
in
sth.
指“参加……活动”,
相当于take
part
in或be
in.
join
指
“参加某个组织或团体”12
.
How
does
Jeff
deal
with
his
sadness?
杰夫怎样处理他的忧伤的?How…deal
with?
“怎样处理?”
相当于“What
….do
with?”
三、重点语法同级比较
1)
表示两者在某一方面程度相等时,用句型
“as
+
形容词/副词原级
+
as
+
比较对象”.
表
“与……一样”.
如:
Celia
is
as
patient
as
Sue.
西莉亚与苏一样耐心.
Jim
draws
as
well
as
Tom.
吉姆画得与汤姆一样好.
2)
表示某人或某物在某一方面,不如另一个人或另一物时,用句型
“not
+
as/so
+
形容词/副词原级
+
as
+
比较对象”,
表
“不如……”.
如:
Jim
isn’t
as
tall
as
Tom.=
Tom
is
taller
than
Jim.
吉姆不如汤姆高./
汤姆比吉姆高.
Jim
doesn’t
studies
as
hard
as
Tom.
=
Tom
studies
harder
than
Jim.
吉姆不如汤姆学得努力./
汤姆学得比吉姆努力.

The
roads
here
are
not
as
clean
as
those
in
our
hometown.
这儿的路不如我们家乡的路干净.Topic
3
Michael
is
feeling
better.
一、重点词汇:
(
一
)
词形转换:
1.tense(同义词)nervous

2.true(副词)truly

3.expression(动词)express

4.
husband(对应词)wife

5.
choice(动词)choose
6.
relax(形容词)relaxed

7.thought(动词)think
8.
decision(动词)decide
9.safe(名词)safety
(
二
)
重点词组:
1.
have
a
bad
cold
患重感冒
2.
get
injections

打针;注射
3.
follow
the
doctor’s
advice
遵从医嘱
4.
stay
at
home
alone

独自呆在家里
5.
come
over
to过来;顺便来访
6.
at
the
end
of
the
month在月底
7.
take
it
easy
别急;慢慢来，放轻松点
8.
take
turns
to
do
sth.

轮流做某事
9.
be
happy
for
sb.
为某人高兴
10.
in
a
good/bad
mood

处于好/坏的情绪
11.
stay/keep
angry
保持生气(的状态)
12.
smile
at
life
笑对生活
13.
plan
a
surprise

计划一个惊喜
14.
make
masks
with
different
expressions

制作具有不同表情的面具15.
put
on
a
short
play

表演短剧
16.
prepare
for
为……做准备
17.
get
along
with

与……相处
18.
look
up
into
the
sky
抬头望向天空
19.
at
midnight
在半夜
20.
on
the
way
home在回家的路上
21.
give
a
speech

演讲
22.
try
out
尝试;试验
23.
in
high
spirits

兴高采烈
24.
think
over
仔细思考
25.
bring
back
a
sense
of
safety找回安全感
二、重点句型及重点语言点
1.
I’m
feeling
even
worse.
我甚至觉得更糟了.
much,
a
little
与even常用来修饰比较级.
如:
He
is
much
older
than
me.他比我大得多。
Jim
is
a
little
taller
than
Tom.
吉姆比汤姆高一点。
2.
I’m
afraid
of
catching
SARS.
我害怕患上非典.
I’m
afraid
of
getting
injections.
我害怕打针.
be
afraid
of
(doing
)
sth.
表”害怕(做)某事/物”
如:
I
am
afraid
of
snakes.
我害怕蛇.
He
is
afraid
of
swimming.
他害怕游泳.3.
I
stay
at
home
alone.
我独自一人呆在家中.
alone
表示
“单独的;独自的”,
指客观上的.只作表语,不能做定语.
lonely表示
“孤单的;
寂寞的”,
指主观上的.
既可作表语也可做定语.如:
He
lives
alone,
but
he
never
feels
lonely.
他一个人生活,但他从不感到孤单.
He
is
a
lonely
man.
他是一个孤独的人.
a
lonely
road
一条偏僻的道路
4.
If
we
have
time,
we’ll
come
over
to
see
you
again.
如果我们有时间,我们将会顺便再来看你.
If
we
are
always
sad
and
worried,
we’ll
become
angry
easily.
如果我们老是伤心,焦虑的话,我们就会容易生气.
If
we
stay
angry
for
too
long,
we’ll
be
ill.
如果我们长时间生气的话,我们就会生病.
if引导条件状语从句.从句用一般现在时,主句用一般将来时.
5.
I
feel
so
lonely
that
my
eyes
are
full
of
tears.我感到如此的孤独,以致于热泪盈眶.
6.
Suddenly
the
bus
stops
and
can’t
move
any
more.突然公共汽车停下来,再也不动了.
not…any
more
=
no
more
表
“不再……”,
指次数上不再.
not…any
longer=no
longer表
“不再……”,
指时间上不再.
如:
You
aren’t
a
child
any
longer.
=
You
are
no
longer
a
child.你不再是个小孩了.
We
didn’t
visit
him
any
more.
=
We
visited
him
no
more.
我们再也不去拜访他了.

三、重点语法
1.
make
+
宾语
+
形容词

“使某人怎样”
It
makes
me
so
tense.
(
Page
17)
The
nurse
there
makes
me
nervous.
(
Page
17)
We
should
do
something
to
make
him
happy
again.
(
Page
19)
Illness
can
make
us
sad
and
worried.
(
Page
19)
It
sometimes
makes
us
afraid.
(
Page
19)
Sometimes
it
makes
me
happy.
(
Page
20)
Sometimes
it
makes
me
sad.
(
Page20)
I
think
it
can
make
me
happier.
(
Page
20)
And
orange
will
make
us
happier,
white
will
make
us
helpful…(
Page
21)
Bright
colors
make
me
happy.
(
Page
22)
Dark
colors
make
me
sad.
(
Page
22)
Rainy
days
make
me
sad.
(
Page
22)
They
make
me
angry.
(
Page
22)
2.
make
sb,
do
sth.
使(让)
某人做某事

Some
programs
on
TV
make
me
want
to
sleep.
(
Page
18)

Many
things
can
make
our
feeling
change.
(
Page
19)
That
will
help
make
him
or
her
get
well
soon.
(
Page
19)
They
can
make
me
feel
very
sad.
(
Page
20)
Our
clothes
can
make
us
feel
better
about
ourselves.
(
Page
21)
If
one
color
can’t
make
us
feel
better,
maybe
another
will.
(
Page
21)
Rock
music
always
makes
me
want
to
dance.
(
Page
22)
Sad
movies
always
make
me
cry(
Page
22).
When
I
am
happy,
loud
rock
music
makes
me
more
excited
and
active.
(
Page
22)
But,
when
I
am
unhappy,
loud
music
makes
me
feel
bored
and
angry.
(
Page
22)
Talking
with
others
can
make
you
feel
less
lonely
and….
(
Page
23)Unit
6Enjoying
Riding
Topic
1

We’re
going
on
a
spring
field
trip

一、重点词汇：
（一）?
词形转换1.
cycle
(名词)bicycle(现在分词)cycling

2.
vehicle(同义词)transportation3.
journey
(同义词)travel4.
raise(现在分词)raising(名词)raiser

(二)
重点词组
1.??????
go
on
a
spring
field
trip
去春游
2.??????
a
two-day
visit
to
Mount
Tai
为期两天的泰山游
3.??????
make
a
decision

做出决定
4.??????
work
in
groups小组合作
5.??????
find
out
查找；弄清
6.??????
bring
back带回
7.??????
decide
on
sth.
对某事做出决定
8.??????
take
too
long
花太久（时间）
9.??????
book
some
tickets/rooms预定车票/房间
10.??
the
hard/soft
sleeper硬卧/软卧
11.??
pay
for

付款
12.??
make
hotel
reservation
预定酒店房间
13.??
many
kinds
of
rooms

许多类型的房间
14.??
the
best
time
to
do
sth.
做某事的最佳时间
15.??
work
out
the
cost
估算/算出费用
16.??
do/go
fund
raising
=
raise
money/
funds筹集资金
17.??
come
up
with
产生；想出；赶上
18.??
get
to
(call
home)
达到（打电话回家）的程度
19.??
order
and
serve
a
special
lunch

安排服务一段特殊的午餐
20.??
sell
newspapers/
old
books/
flowers

卖报/旧书/花
21.??
organize
a
show
组织一场展示会
22.??
not…any
longer
=
no
longer
不再
23.??
enjoy
a
good
trip
享受愉快的旅行
24.??
at
the
foot
of…

在…的脚下
25.??
count
the
students
点名
26.??
look
at/
appreciate
the
night
scene看/欣赏夜景
27.??
rent
coats租借大衣
28.??
see
the
sunrise看日出
29.??
land
safely

安全着陆
二.??
重点句型及重点语言点
1.
…
,
we
will
go
on
a
two-day
visit
to
Mount
Tai,
…我们将去泰山进行为期两天的旅行。
two-day
“两天的”
,
这是带有数字的复合形容词,复合形容词用连字符号连接时,名词要用单数。如：a
14-year-old
boy

一个十四岁的男孩

a
100-meter
race
一百米赛跑a
two-day
visit
为期两天的旅行
2.
We
will
make
the
decision
together.
我们将一起作出决定。
make
a
decision
=
decide
做决定
decide
(not)
to
do
sth.
决定(不)做某事
decide
on
sth.
对某事做出决定
3.
Going
by
train
doesn’t
cost
as
much
as
by
plane,
and
going
by
bus
is
not
as
comfortable
as
by
train.
搭火车的费用没有搭飞机的高，搭公车不如搭火车舒适。“going
by
train”
动名词短语在句中做主语。
cost
表“花费（金钱/时间）”时，主语必须是事物。常用句型“
sth.
costs
(sb.)
some
money/time”中。如：This
bike
cost
me
300
yuan.
这本书花了我三百元钱。Finishing
the
homework
costs
me
two
hours
a
day.
通常，每天做完作业花了我两个小时。
4.??????
We’ve
got
tickets
at
￥
120
for
the
hard
sleeper
and
￥
180
for
the
soft
sleeper.我们的的票价是硬卧票120元，软卧票180元。
at
在句中表“以……的价格”.
如:
We’ve
got
tickets
at
￥80
for
The
Sound
of
Music.
我们有80元一张的《音乐之声》门票。
5．I
want
to
book
10
rooms
with
two
single
beds
…
我想订10间有两张单人床的房间…
with
结构在句中作定语，修饰前面的名词，表特征。如：
a
girl
with
light
hair
一个金发女郎

a
boy
with
big
eyes
一个大眼睛男孩
6．?
My
school
in
America
raised
a
lot
of
money
for
our
band
trip
last
year.
去年,
我在美国的学校为我们的团队筹集了很多钱。
raise
及物动词，表示“筹集”外，还表“举起；使升高”，一般指把某物从低处抬高到高处。如：
She
raised
her
hand.
她举起了她的手。
He
raised
his
glass
to
Mr.
Li.他举杯向李先生祝贺。
rise
不及物动词，表示“上升；升起；上涨”一般指事物本身由低处移到高处。如：
The
sun
rises
in
the
east.
太阳从东边升起。
The
river/
price
rose.
河水上涨了。
7.
Some
schools
come
up
with
great
fund
raisers
,
…
一些学校产生出伟大的集资者，……come
up
with
表示“想出；产生；
赶上”
如：Suddenly
he
came
up
with
a
strange
idea.
突然间他想出了一个奇怪的主意。
We
came
up
with
the
train
in
time.
我们及时赶上了火车。
8.
It
takes
students
one
yuan
each
to
buy
tickets
for
a
draw
to
become
king
or
queen
for
a
day.
学生要想成为
“一日国王”或
“一日王后”,
就要花一元钱买票才可以参加抽奖。
此句型为“It
takes
sb.
some
money/
time
to
do
sth.”花了某人多少钱/时间做某事。
9.
The
student
sits
in
the
principal’s
chair
for
the
day
and
even
gets
to
call
home,
using
the
principal’s
cell
phone.
这个学生可以坐在校长的座位上，甚至可以（达到）使用校长的手机打电话回家（的程度）。get
to
+
地点，表“到达某处”如：They
always
get
to
school
on
time.
他们总是按时到校。get
to
do
表“达到做某事（的程度）；
开始（感觉到，认识到，成为）”如：After
a
time,
you
get
to
realize
that
these
things
don’t
matter.
过段时间你会觉得这些事情并不要紧。
三.??
重点语法(一)?
结果状语从句
1)?????
…
,
so
…
“因此”,
常与because
引导的原因状语从句转换.
如:

We
don’t
have
much
money,
so
we
should
go
fund
raising.=
Because
we
don’t
have
much
money,
we
should
go
fund
raising.

Helen
is
worried
about
her
trip
cost,
so
she
is
sad.海伦担心她的旅行费用，因此她很难过。

=
Helen
is
sad
because
she
is
about
her
trip
cost.
海伦很难过是因为她担心旅行的费用。
2)?????
…
so
…
that
…
“如此…
以致于…”,
如结果表否定时,常与too
+
adj./
adv.
+to
do
sth.句型转换.
a)?????
主语
+
be
+
so
+
adj.
+
that
+
句子
e.g:
I
was
so
tired
that
I
couldn’t
go
on
any
longer.
=
I
was
too
tired
to
go
on
any
longer.
The
cost
is
so
expensive
that
we
should
raise
money.

b)?????
主语
+
实义动词+
so
+
adv.
+
that
+
句子
e.g:
He
plays
basketball
so
well
that
we
all
like
to
play
with
him.

他球打得如此好，以致于我们都喜欢他。

He
got
up
so
late
that
he
couldn’t
catch
the
bus.
他起床如此迟，以致他赶不上车。

=
He
got
up
too
late
to
catch
the
bus.
他起床起得太迟了而不能赶上车。
3)?????
…
so
that
…
结果
e.g.:
Jane
often
makes
noise
so
that
I
can
not
fall
asleep.

珍妮经常吵闹，结果我无法入睡。
(二)?
动词不定式
1)
作表语,
常用在系动词之后.
Your
group’s
task
is
to
find
out
the
cost
to
go
by
train.

你小组的任务是去弄清搭火车的费用。
She
seems
to
be
happy.
她似乎很快乐。
2)
作主语,
常用it（形式主语）代替,
不定式放在后面做真正主语.
It
is
hard
to
say.

很难说。
It
is
important
to
learn
English
well.
学好英语非常重要。
4)?????
作宾语,
常用在want;
like;
hope;
begin;
try;
forget;
learn;
plan;
decide;
need
等及物动词后,构成动宾结构。
I
want
to
buy
some
books.
我想去买一些书。
She
likes
to
join
the
English
Club.
她喜欢加入英语俱乐部。
We
hope
to
be
teachers.

我们希望成为教师。
Don’t
forget
to
call
me.

别忘了打电话给我。
5)?????
作宾补,
6)?????
作定语，常用在被修饰的名词/代词之后。
I
have
some
exciting
news
to
tell
you.

我有一些令人激动的消息告诉你。
I
want
something
to
drink.

我想要些喝的东西。
四、口语应用
预订车票、房间：
Can
I
help
you?
/
What
can
I
do
for
you?
Yes.
I
want/
would
like
to
book
…
Which
kind
of
ticket
o
you
want,
the
hard
sleeper
or
the
soft
sleeper?
What
kind
of
room
do
you
have?
How
many
do
you
want?
How
much
does
…cost?
May
I
have
your
name
and
your
number?
Topic
2

Let’s
go
exploring.
?一、重点词汇：
（一）??
词形转换：
1.
death(动词)
die

2..
east(形容词)
eastern3.
west(形容词)
western

4.
south(形容词)southern
5.
north(形容词)
northern
6.
kneel(过去式)
knelt/kneeled7.
crowd(形容词)
crowded8.
huge(同义词)
large
9.
push(反义词)pull

?10.
step(过去式)stepped
11.
sight(动词)
see

12.
beat(过去式)
beat13.
slap(过去式)
slapped
14.
satisfy(形容词)
satisfied15.diary(复数)diaries16.
destroy(过去式)
destroyed
17.
inside(对应词)
outside18.
historical(名词)
history
（二）重点词组:
1.??????
receive
a
postcard

收到一张明信片
2.??????
have
a
vacation
度假
3.??????
cost
too
much
花费太贵
4.??????
plan
a
trip
计划旅行
5.??????
come
along
with
sb.
与某人在一起
6.??????
go
to
the
cinema去电影院
7.??????
look
forward
to
(doing)
sth.

期待做某事
8.??????
go
camping去野营
9.??????
in
the
old
days
在古代
10.??
in
one’s
life在某人的一生
11.??
survey
the
area
调查/勘探某地区
12.??
face
south
坐北朝南
13.??
have
mountains
at
the
back

背靠群山
14.??
plan
some
exciting
adventures
计划令人激动的冒险活动
15.??
go
on
a
cycling
trip
进行骑车游
16.??
spread
over

散开
17.??
on
both
sides
of
the
way
在路的两旁
18.??
be
in
pairs成双成对
19.??
kneel
down

跪下
20.??
two
and
a
half
hours两个半小时
21.??
be
crowded
with

挤满了…
22.??
be
surprised
at对…感到惊讶
23.??
take
out
sth.
拿出某物
24.??
elbow
one’s
way
用肘推开路
25.??
take
a
close-up
picture
of…
拍……的特写
26.??
push
out挤出;推出
27.??
step
on
one’s
toes
踩了某人的脚趾
28.??
out
of
sight
看不见
29.??
flash
through
one’s
mind

从脑中闪现
30.??
pour
down
流下;倾泻而下
31.??
slap
sb.
on
the
back

拍某人的背
32.??
as
soon
as

一……就……
33.??
give
sb.
a
big
hug
给某人一个拥抱
34.??
pack
one’s
backpacks
打包
35.??
do
the
last
safety
check做最后的安检
36.??
take
each
other’s
pictures
互相拍照
37.??
have
fun
doing
sth.

做某事有乐趣
38.??
treat
sb.
to
sth.
用……招待,请客
39.??
tell
sb.
about
sth.
告诉某人关于某事
二、重点句型及重点语言点
1.??????
I’m
looking
forward
to
meeting
him.
我正盼望看到他.

look
forward
to
表
“期待,
盼望”,
to是介词,后面应用名词、代词或动名词，且常用于进行时态。如：
I’m
really
look
forward
to
summer
vacation.
我真的期待着暑假的到来。
They
are
looking
forward
to
solving
the
problem.
他们正期待着问题的解决。2．
…and
12
stone
officials
on
both
sides
of
the
way.
on
both
sides
of
the
way
=
on
each
side
of
the
way
在路的两旁
3.??????
Dinglig
is
to
the
southwest
of
Kangling.
定陵在康陵的西南方向.
方位介词:
in;
on;
to
in表在范围内;
on表两处相接;
to
表在范围内
Fujian
is
in
the
southeast
of
China.
福建在中国的东南部.
Jiangxi
is
on
the
west
of
Fujian.
江西在福建的西面.
Japan
is
to
the
east
of
China.
日本在中国的东边.
4.??????
We
were
having
fun
exploring
when
I
noticed
Darren
wasn’t
beside
me.

当我们正在有趣的探险时,我注意到达诺不在我身边.
have
fun
doing
sth.
表做某事有乐趣.
如:
You’ll
find
you
have
fun
learning
English.
你将会发现学习英语有很大乐趣.

三、重点语法(一)??
时间状语从句:
1.??????
引导词:
a)???????
when;
while;
as
当……时候
when
既可跟短暂性动词也可跟延续性动词
while
跟延续性动词
as多用于口语,强调
“同一时间”或
“一前一后”
e,g:
The
students
were
talking
in
the
classroom
when
the
teacher
came
in.
=
While
the
students
were
talking
in
the
classroom,
the
teacher
came
in.
Mother
always
sings
as
she
cooks
dinner
for
us.
妈妈总是边给我们做饭边唱歌。
b)???????
until;
not…until
until
“直到……为止”，主句的谓语动词用延续性动词。
not…until
“直到……才”
主句的谓语动词常用短暂性动词。
e.g:
I
will
stay
here
until
the
rain
stops.

=
I
won’t
leave
here
until
the
rain
stops.
c)???????
after
在……之后;
before在……之前;
as
soon
as
一……就……
e.g:
I
went
to
sleep
after
I
finished
my
homework..

=
I
finished
my
homework
before
I
went
to
sleep.

As
soon
as
the
bell
rings,
the
students
will
go
into
the
classroom.
2.??????
时态:
a)???????
当主句为一般过去时时,
从句常为过去的某种时态;
e.g:
While
the
students
were
talking
in
the
classroom,
the
teacher
came
in.

I
went
to
sleep
after
I
finished
my
homework..
b)???????
当主句为一般将来时时,
从句为一般现在时
e.g:
As
soon
as
the
bell
rings,
the
students
will
go
into
the
classroom.

I
will
stay
here
until
the
rain
stops.
(二)??
不定式作目的状语，修饰谓语动词，表行为的目的。
They
organize
a
show
to
raise
money.
为了筹钱，他们组织了一场展示会。
Kelly
arrived
at
the
airport
early
to
see
Maria
off.
凯丽早早地来到机场为玛丽亚送行。四、交际用语
Would
you
like
to
come
to
China
for
your
vacation?
你想来中国度假吗？（表邀请）
Would/
Will
you
help
me
plan
a
trip?
帮我计划一下旅行好吗？（表请求）
Could/
Can
you
come
along
with
us?
你能和我们在一起好吗？（表邀请或请求）
Should
we
take
him
there?
我们带他们去那儿好吗？（表建议）
How
about
taking
him
to
the
Ming
Tombs?带他去十三陵怎么样？（表建议）
??

Topic
3
Cycling
is
fun!
一、重点词汇:
(
一
)
重点词组:
1.??????
cross
the
street

横穿街道
2.??????
obey
traffic
rules/
laws遵守交通规则/法规
3.??????
save
money
and
energy节省资金和能源
4.??????
avoid
air
pollution避免空气污染
5.??????
need
less
space

需要更少的空间
6.??????
warn
sb.
about
sth.提醒某人当心某事
7.??????
a
sharp
turn
to
the
left
向左急转弯
8.??????
slow
down
减速
9.??????
knock
into…碰撞……
10.??
avoid
doing
sth.
避免做某事
11.??
call
122
hotline
播打122热线
12.??
send
sb.
to
spl.

送某人去某处
13.??
have
strict
traffic
rules
有严格的交通规则
14.??
receive
a
call
from
sb.
收到某人的电话
15.??
learn
…by
heart
用心学习……
16.??
wear
a
bicycle
helmet
戴着自行车头盔
17.??
go
on
special
bike
paths

在特殊的自行车道上行走
18.??
break
the
traffic
rules
违反交通规则
19.??
get
a
fine

得到处罚
20.??
encourage
sb.
to
do
sth.

鼓励某人做某事
21.??
pay
attention
to
(doing)
sth.
…
注意（做）某事
22.??
on
the
left-side
of
the
road
在路的左手边
23.??
need
less
space
需要更少的空间
24.??
hundreds
of
millions
of上亿的
25.??
go
through
穿过；穿越
26.??
come
to来到；涉及
27.??
not…but…
不是…而是…
28.??
return
to

返回到…
29.??
win
the
bicycle
race
获得自行车赛的胜利
30.??
since
then
从那以后
31.??
one
of
the
top
one-day
racers

一日成名的顶尖赛手之一
32.??
according
to据……而言
33.??
be
famous
for

因……而出名
34.??
fight
off

尽力击退/
克服
35.??
break
a
record
打破记录
二、重点句型及重点语言点
1.??????
I
want
to
tell
you
about
a
bike
accident
and
warn
you
about
the
crazy
traffic.我想告诉你一个自行车事故，并提醒你当心混乱的交通。
warn
sb.
about
sth.
提醒某人当心某事，
如：
The
teachers
warn
the
students
about
the
steps.
老师提醒学生们当心台阶。
He
warned
me
about
the
cruel
dog.
他提醒我当心那只恶狗。

2．He
knocked
into
the
wall
to
avoid
hitting
the
truck..
他为了避免撞到卡车上而撞到墙上.
knock
into
撞到、碰到
He
knocked
into
the
old
man
when
he
was
running.
他在奔跑时撞到了墙上。
avoid
doing
sth.
避免做某事
We
should
avoid
making
mistakes.
我们应当避免犯错误。

3．…,
the
122
hotline
received
a
call
from
a
truck
driver.
122热线接到卡车司机的电话。
receive
a
letter
from
sb.=
hear
from
sb.
收到某人的来信

4．I
agree
with
you.
我同意你的看法。
agree
with
同意某人（的看法/
意见），主语通常是事物而不是人。
agree
to
表示“同意，赞成”，后面跟的是表示想法，建议或计划等的词。
e.g.:
I
agree
with
what
he
said.
我同意他讲的话。
He
didn’t
agree
to
our
idea.
他不同意我们的想法。

5．If
you
break
the
traffic
rules,
you
will
get
a
fine.
如果你违反交通规则，你就会受到处罚。

fine
既可当名词，也可当动词。
He
got
a
￥50
fine
for
parking
the
wrong
places.
他因乱停车罚款五十元。（名词）
The
policeman
fined
him
50
yuan.
警察罚了他五十元。（动词）

6．Don’t
forget
to
pay
attention
to
the
rules.
别忘了注意交通规则。
pay
attention
to
(doing)
sth
注意做某事
We
must
pay
attention
to
obeying
the
rules.
我们必须注意遵守交通规则。
7．?
Five
years
ago,
Spain’s
Oscar
Freire
won
the
bicycle
race.
五年前，西班牙的奥斯卡.
弗莱尔获得自行车赛的胜利。
win
后面通常跟比赛、竞赛、名次或战争，表“获胜”
beat
后面通常跟人，表“战胜”
e.g.:
He
won
the
first
in
the
match.
他在比赛中获得了第一名。At
last,
he
beat
everyone.
最后他击败了每个人。三、重点语法条件状语从句:
由if
引导,表
“如果”
1.??????
时态:
主句是一般将来时态或具有将来的含义,
从句常用一般现在时.
If
you
break
the
traffic
rules,
you
will
get
a
fine.
If
it
rains
tomorrow,
we
won’t
hold
the
sports
meeting.
If
you
drive
a
car
in
Britain,
you
must
be
careful.
2.??????
“祈使句
+
and
+
陈述句”,
常转换成肯定条件句;
“祈使句
+
or
+
陈述句”,
常转换成否定条件句.Hurry
up,
and
you
will
catch
the
bus.
=
If
you
hurry
up,
you
will
catch
the
bus.

Hurry
up,
or
you
won’t
catch
the
bus.
=
If
you
don’t
hurry,
you
won’t
catch
the
bus.

Be
careful,
or
a
car
may
hit
you.
=
If
you
aren’t
careful,
a
car
may
hit
you.
??
Review
of
Units
5—6
?重点词组：
1.??????
keep
one’s
mind
on
doing
sth.
专心做某事
2.??????
look
out
=
be
careful
小心
3.??????
stay
on
the
side
站在旁边
4.??????
have
a
bird’s
eye
view
of…

鸟瞰
5.??????
ask
for

询问
6.??????
on
the
second
day
在第二天
7.??????
keep
feelings
inside
把情感藏在内心Unit
7
Organizing
a
Food
Festival
Topic
1.
We
need
to
make
some
money
一．重点词汇：
（一）
词形转换：
1.success(形容词)successful
2.invitation(动词)invite3.tooth(复数)teeth
4.friendly(比较级)more
friendly
5.Russia(形容词)Russian

6.Africa(形容词)African
7.India(形容词)Indian
8.sandwich(复数)sandwiches
9.supply(复数)supplies
10.post(名词)poster
（二）重点词组：
1.
hear
of
听说
2.
make
money
挣钱
3.
be
pleased
to
do
很高兴做某事
4.
think
about
思考，思索
5.
think
over
仔细考虑
6.
make
a
poster
做海报
7.
Organize
a
Food
Festival
举办美食节
8.
turn
to
sb./sth.
求助于，求教于
9.
chat
with
sb.
和某人交谈/聊天
10.
what’s
more
而且
11.
never
mind
没关系
12.
work
hard
at
在┅┅方面努力学习
一、
重点句型：
1.Do
you
know
about
Daniel
Igali
?
你知道丹尼尔·艾格雷吗？
know
about“了解”，know
a
lot
about…“对某事了解很深”，know
a
little
about…“对某事或某人了解一些”，而know是“知道”，“认识”之意，如：
I
know
her.我认识她。I
know
about
her.我了解她。二者意思不同。
2.I
have
heard
of
him.我从未听说过他。

hear
of
sb./sth“听说过某人或某事”
hear
+
that从句“听说，得知”
hear
from
sb.“收到某人的来信”
hear“听见”
listen“注意听”
3.I’ll
think
over
how
we
should
organize
the
food
festival.我将仔细考虑我们应该怎样组织这次美食节活动。
think
over“仔细考虑”
think
of/about“考虑，思考”
think
of
还有“想起”之意
4.Let’s
try
our
best
to
make
it
successful.让我们尽力成功举办这次美食节活动。
①try
one’s
best=do
one’s
best尽力，努力
②make
sb./sth.
successful
使……获得成功
5.What’s
more,
I’m
sure
that
selling
rice
and
dumpling
dishes
can
make
a
lot
of
money.
而且，我相信出售米饭和饺子会赚很多钱。
①What’s
more
(口语)而且，更有甚者
She
is
a
beautiful
girl
.What’s
more
,she
is
friendly
to
us.
她是一个漂亮的女孩，而且对人也友好
②selling
rice
and
dumpling
dishes是v-ing分词短语做主语。
6.It’s
a
pleasure.
用于感谢的答语还有：That’s
Ok./That’s
all
right./You’re
welcome./My
pleasure.
7.May
I
invite
you
to
our
food
festival?
Invite
sb.
to
some
place邀请某人去某处
Invite
sb.
to
do
sth.邀请某人做谋事
如：
May
I
invite
you
to
go
shopping
with
me?
我能邀请你一起去购物吗？
8.Extension
six
zero
zero
six,
please.
请接分机号6006。
相当于Can
I
have
extension
six
zero
zero
six
,please
?或Please
dial
extension
six
zero
zero
six.
9.Keep
trying.继续努力吧。
Keep(on)doing
sth.继续/重复做某事
Keep
sb./sth.doing
sth.
让某人持续做某事；让某事持续进行
如：

He
kept
writing
all
the
night.他整晚在写作。
I’ll
try
not
to
keep
you
waiting.我会尽量不让你久等。
10.It
has
very
few
school
supplies.学校设施简陋。
句中supplies是作名词用。如：very
few
school
supplies,这里supplies是名词复数，
译为“学校设施简陋”，supply作为动词用，意为“提供”、“供应”。如：
The
school
supplies
books
for/to
the
children.=The
school
supplies
the
children
with
books.
-学校提供孩子们书籍。即：supply
sth.to/for
sb.或supply
sb.
with
sth.
11.Our
students
will
sell
many
delicious
international
foods
in
order
to
raise
money
for
a
village
school
in
Nigeria.
为了给尼日利亚一所乡村学校筹钱，我们学生将出售许多美味的国际食品。
①in
order
to…意为“为了……”，它引导的动词不定式短语作目的状语。否定结构
用in
order
not
to
,比so
as
to正式，也可以用so
that代替。如：
-
He’ll
try
his
best
to
work
hard
in
order
to/so
as
to
catch
up
with
his
classmates.=
He’ll
try
his
best
to
work
hard
so
that
he
can
catch
up
with
his
classmates.

他将尽全力努力学习为了能赶上他的同学。
②raise
money集资，筹款

26语法学习：
二、
宾语从句
宾语从句在句中起宾语的作用。它可以作动词的宾语，也可以作介词、不定式、分词、动名词以及某些形容词的宾语，宾语从句可以由连词that,
whether,
if,
代词who,
whose,
what,
which和副词when,
where,
how,
why等引导。现先着重介绍连词that引导的宾语从句。下面就举例说明：
I
think
he
will
be
all
right
in
a
few
days.
我想他几天就会好了。
I’m
afraid
(that)you
are
wrong.
恐怕你错了。
I
don’t
think(that)you
are
right.
我认为你不对。
I
hope
that
you’ll
be
better
soon.
我希望你很快康复。
I
heard
that
he
joined
the
army.
我听说他参军了。
I’m
glad
that
you
are
ready
to
help
others.
我很高兴你乐意帮助别人。
学习宾语从句应注意几点：
(1).引导词
(2).时态（时态一致）
(3).语序（陈述）
三、
征求对方意见或提建议的句型。
提建议、征询对方意见的四种表达方式
(1)
Shall
I
(we)
……?
常用在提供帮助，提出建议，要求给以指示和征求意见，常译为我（们）……，好吗？
如：Shall
I
(we)
open
the
window?
我（们）把窗户打开，好吗？
(2)
May
I……?
常用在征求对方意见的句子中，常译为“我可以……吗？”
如：May
I
invite
you
to
organize
the
Food
Festival
with
me
?
我可以邀
请你和我一起组织这次美食节吗？
(3)
Will
you
……?
常用于请求对方完成某一动作，同时征求对方意见，常译为“请你……好吗？”如：
Will
you
please
call
me
this
evening?
请你今晚打电话给我好吗？
(4)
Would
you
like
to…?Would
like
to
do
sth.

想要做某事。如：
Would
you
like
to
eat
another
moon
cake?
你想再来一块月饼吗？
26.
日常交际用语：谈论社交活动中有关常见的日常交际用语
Shall
we
have
a
food
festival
to
make
money
for
his
school
?
May
I
invite
you
to
our
food
festival
?
I’d
love
to,
but
I’m
afraid
I
have
no
time.
Will
you
please
tell
me
something
about…?
What’s
up
?
Thank
you
for
inviting
me
to
your
food
festival.
Topic2
Cooking
is
fun
一．
重点词汇：
（一）词形转换：
1.cook(名词)cook/cooker
2.fine(副词)finely
3.gentle(副词)gently
4.noise(形容词)noisy
5.noisy(副词)noisily

6.hot（名词）heat
7.polite(反义词)impolite

8.proud(名词)pride
（二）重点词组：
1.be
ready
to
do
sb./sth.
乐意/准备做某事
2.be
kind
to
sb./sth
.
对某人/某物友好
3.slice…finely
精细地把……切小
4.for
a
few
minutes
过了一会儿
5.fill…with…
用……装满
6.drink
to
somebody
为……干杯（或祝酒）
7.finish
doing
做完某事
8.sit
down
at
the
table
坐在桌子旁边
9.at
table
吃饭，就餐
10.start
with
以……开始
11..raise
glass
举杯
12.take
a
sip
喝一小口
13.around
the
world=all
over
the
world=in
the
world
世界各地
二.重点句型：
1.You
often
teach
me
to
be
kind
to
the
poor
and
the
old.

你经常教我要善待穷人和老人。
①teach
sb.
to
do
sth.教某人（如何）做某事②be
kind
to
do
sth.
kind是形容词，译为“善待某人”
2.Would
you
like
me
to
help
you?
你需要我的帮忙吗？
该句表示“客气的请求”，相当于Would
you
like
+
to
do…?或Will
you
please
+
do…?
另外like
sb.
to
do
sth.,这里like是动词，相当于want,译为“要某人做某事”。
3.It’s
very
kind
of
you.
你真是太好了。
该句等同于You
are
very
kind.
4.After
that,
fill
bowels
70%—80%
full
with
bone
soup
slowly.
之后，慢慢地在碗里加7—8分的骨头汤。
fill
…with“用……装满”,fill用作动词，构成be
filled
with等同于be
full
of译为“充满，装满”
如：
Fill
the
glass
with
water.往杯子里注满水（强调动作）
The
glass
is
filled
of
water.=
The
glass
is
full
of
water.

杯子里装满了水（强调状态）5.It’s
not
impolite
to
smoke
during
a
meal
in
France.
在法国，吃饭时吸烟不是不礼貌的。
During是介词，后常跟名词或短语，而while是连词，后常跟从句。如：What
did
you
do
during
the
summer
holiday?
在暑假期间你做了什么？这里不能用while代替。
6.what
does
the
dinner
start
with
?
晚餐先吃什么？
begin/start
with
以……开始，如：Let’s
start
our
class
with
Unit
1.
让我们从第一单元开始上课。
7.Never
drink
too
much
during
a
dinner.
就餐时千万别喝太多。
too
much
是用来修饰不可数名词，too
many是修饰可数名词，而much
too是修饰形容词和副词。如：too
much
water太多的水，too
many
trees太多的树木，much
too
tired太累了

8.In
parts
of
India,
they
use
their
fingers
and
bread
to
pick
up
the
food
.在印度地区，他们用手指和面包来抓食物。
这里pick
up译为“抓起，拾起”，另外还有“（用车）接（人或物）之意。如：
I’ll
come
to
pick
you
up.我会开车去接你。
三、语法学习：
1.宾语从句（二）
宾语从句的第二种类型由if或whether连接词引导，语序要用陈述句语序，意思是
“是否”“是不是”。如：
I
don’t
know
if/whether
it
is
fine
tomorrow.(语序必须是陈述句的)
Do
you
know
if/whether
he’ll
come?
I
don’t
know
if/whether
he’ll
come.（宾语从句用将来时态）
Δ比较:If
he
comes
tomorrow,
let
me
know.(条件状语从句用现在时态)
Δ注：if引导状语从句，译为“如果”；引导宾语从句，译为“是否”，等同于whether。当宾语从句后面有or
not时，一般用whether,不用if。
2．掌握并懂得正确应用It
is+adj.
+
to
do
sth..句型
It
is+adj.
+
to
do
sth.句型中it是形式主语，真正的主语是动词不定式。通常若主语太长，为避免头重脚轻，可用it
作形式主语，将动词不定式后置。如：
It
is
necessary
to
study
English
hard.
It’s
polite
to
smoke
during
a
meal
in
France.

四、日常交际用语：有关就餐前的日常交际用语
What’s
the
most
popular
in
your
restaurant
?
.What’s
your
favorite
Chinese
dish?
.Would
you
like
me
to
help
you?
Of
course.
It’s
very
kind
of
you.
.How
do
you
to
make
it?
It
sounds
difficult.
.Well
done!Topic3.
A
wonderful
food
festival!
一、重点词汇：
（一）词型转换：
1.sell
(名词)sale
2.buy
(反义词)
sell
3.else
(同义词)other
4.regular
(副词)regularly
5.noisily
(比较级)more
noisily6.neatly
(最高级)most
neatly
（二）重点词组：
1.shine
brightly
阳光灿烂
2.many
different
delicious
food
各种不同的可口食物
3.on
sale
上市，出售
4.kind―hearted
心地善良
5.a
table
for
two
一张双人桌
6.have
the
bill=get/pay
the
bill
结帐，付帐
7.go
Dutch
各付各的帐/AA制
8.main
course
主食，主菜
9.go
well
进展顺利
10.sell
well
卖得很好
11.be
worth
doing…
值得做……
12.send
to…
把……寄给
13.send
for…
派人去请
14.keep
a
balanced
diet
保持日常饮食均衡
15.not
only…but
also…
不但……而且
16.not
all
并非所有的
二、重点句型：
1.enjoy
yourselves!
祝你们玩得开心！
enjoy
oneself
相当于have
a
good
/nice/great/wonderful
time
2.Anything
else
?
还要别的吗？
else译为“别的”“其他的”常修饰疑问词，不定代词并放在所修饰词的后面。如：what
else,
who
else,
nobody
else,
something
else等。other也表示“别的”“其他的”，但它修饰名词。如：some
other
people其他的一些人，other修饰名词people,不能用else代替。
3.The
Beijing
roast
duck
smells
nice
and
tastes
nice,
too.
北京烤鸭闻起来很香尝起来也香。

①
这里smell和taste都是系动词，后面加上形容词nice表语，构成系表结构，“系动词+adj.”构成系表结构，这类动词还有look,
feel,
sound,
seem,
get,
turn,
become,
grow,
make,
keep等。②too,
also,
as
well和either
都可以表示“也”，但用法不同：
also较正式，位置通常接近动词，不用于句末：too多用于口语，位置通常在句末，前面
常有逗号隔开，as
well也多用于口语，只用于句末，以上3个词都不用于否定句，而either
却用于否定句。如
He
also
plays
the
piano.他也弹钢琴。
He
is
a
worker,
too.
他也是个工人。
He
plays
the
guitars
as
well.他也弹吉他。
He
was
not
there
,either.他也不在那里。
4.We
must
remember
that
we
should
eat
not
only
our
favorite
food
but
also
other
healthy
food.
我们必须记住我们不仅要吃我们喜欢吃的食物，而且还要吃其他有益健康的食物
not
only…but
also…不但……而且，这种结构属于“对称”的句型，要求only和also
尽量用同样的词语，如：
She
not
only
reads
English
,but
also
speaks
French.
她不仅能看懂英语，而且还能说法语。
5.The
more
regularly
we
eat,
the
healthier
we
are.我们的饮食越有规律，我们身体就越健康。The+比较级……，the+比较级……表越……就越。如：
The
more
trees
we
plant,
the
more
beautiful
our
city
is.
我们种越多的树，我们的城市就越漂亮。
6.Not
all
students
have
a
regular
breakfast.并非所有的学生早餐饮食有规律。
Not
all译成“并非所有的”，是部分否定。如：
Not
all
students
like
swimming.
并不是所有的学生喜欢游泳。
三、
语法学习：
1.宾语从句第三种类是由what,
which,
whose
,
whom,
who,
where,
when,
why,
how等引导，应注意语序变化（宾语从句是陈述语序）这类宾语从句是由特殊问句转变而来的，要用wh–特殊疑问词来引导，意义即为疑问词本身的含义。如：
Tell
me
what
you
want.告诉我你想要什么？
Can
you
hear
what
I
said?
你能听见我说了什么吗？
You
may
ask
him
when
he
come.你可以问他什么时候来。
Do
you
know
who
will
come
at
the
meeting?你知道谁要来参加会议吗？
Tell
me
how
she
looked
after
her
operation.告诉我她术后恢复的怎么样。
注意：(1)宾语从句的语序必须是陈述语序，尤其要注意whether,
if和wh–疑问句引导的宾语从句的语序，即按照主语，谓语的顺序。如：
Do
you
know
why
winter
is
colder
than
summer?你知道为什么冬季比夏季冷吗？
I
don’t
know
who
all
those
people
are.我不知道那些人是谁。
(2)宾语从句要考虑“时态一致”即当主句是过去时，从句也要用过去的某一时态。如：
He
asked
me
which
my
favorite
Chinese
dish
was.他问我最喜爱的中国菜是那一样。
Did
you
know
who
they
were?你知道他们是谁吗？
(3)若宾语从句跟在动词think,
believe,
suppose,
except等后面，表示“要”，“认为”，句子的否定在主句上，称“否定前移”。如：
I
don"t
think
you
are
right.我认为你是不对的。
You
don"t
think
he
is
right,
do
you?
你认为他是不对的，是吗？
2.副词的比较级和最高级的构成

（1）规则副词的比较级和最高级的构成规则。如下表：单音节词或少数双音节词构成规则
一般在词尾
加–er或
–est
以e结尾的词加
–r或–st
以辅音字母+y结尾的词，改y为i,在加–er或–est例词
fast
faster
fastest
late
later
latest
early
earlier
earliest多音节词和部分双音节词
构成规则
在词前加more或most例词
slowly
more
slowly
most
slowly
carefully
more
carefully
most
carefully少数不规则副词的比较级和最高级的变化形式如下表：原级
well
badly
little
much
far
比较级
better
worse
less
more
farther/further
最高级
best
worst
least
most
farthest/furthest
(2)
副词比较等级的用法
a.
同级比较：表示两者在某一方面程度相同时，用“as+副词原形+as”的句式；但表示前者不如后者时，用“not
so(as)+副词原形+as”的句式。如；
The
boys
are
listening
as
carefully
as
the
girls.
男生们跟女生们在一样认真地听。
He
didn’t
dance
so(as)
well
as
Jim.
他跳舞没有吉姆跳得好b.比较级：表示一方程度比另一方更高时，用“副词比较级+than”的句式。在这一句式中，当than前后的动词相同时，通常用助动词代替后面的动词。该动词或助动词可以省略。副词比较级前常用much.,
a
little,
still,
even表示“更……”，这也可以作为判断比较级的依据。如：
I
sing
better
than
she
(does).
我唱歌比她唱得好。
My
brother
did
much
better
in
his
lessons
than
I.我哥哥功课学得比我好多了。

c.最高级：表示三个或三个以上的人或物的比较时，用副词最高级。结构为“the+副词最高级+比较范围。”其中的the常省去，比较范围常用of或in…短语。如：
Maria
speaks
English
(the)
best
in
our
class.
在我们班上，玛丽亚英语讲得最好。
He
studies
(the)
hardest
of
the
three
boys.
这三个男孩中，他学习最用功。
四、日常交际用语：有关就餐时日常交际用语
Here
is
the
menu
for
you.
May
I
take
your
order?
Would
you
like
to
try…?/start
with…?
I’d
like…,please.
Which
kind
of
drink
would
you
like,
beer,
wine
or
tea?

Anything
else?
No,
that’s
all.
May
I
have
the
bill?
Let’s
go
Dutch.
Unit
8Topic
1
What
a
nice
coat
!
一．
重点词汇及短语：
（一）词汇：
1.服装名称：
belt腰带
blouse宽松的上衣

boots
靴子

cap
帽子
coat外套
dress套裙
gloves手套

hat
帽子
jacket夹克
jeans牛仔裤

pants裤子raincoat雨衣
scarf围巾
shirt衬衣
shoes鞋子
shorts
短裤
skirt裙子
socks
短袜stockings长袜
suit套服
sweater毛衣tie领带
2.小件
briefcase公文包

purse钱包umbrella雨伞
wallet
皮夹
3.衣服号码
small小号medium
中号
large
大号extra
large特大号
（二）短语：
1.on
the
first
floor

在一楼
2.get…from…
从……中得到……
3.shopping
center
购物中心4.catch
one’s
eye
吸引某人的注意
5.go
with…
与……相配
6.on
special
days
在特殊的日子
7.in
fact
事实上，实际上
8.thanksgiving
Day
感恩节
9.depend
on依靠，依赖,相信
10.It’s
said
that

据说
11.Santa
Claus
圣诞老人
12.the
same…as…
与……一样
13.protect…from…
保护……使不受……
14.as
well
as
也，还
15.be
made
of/from
由……制成
二．
重点句型：
1.what’s
it
made
of?它是由什么做成的？
be
made
of意为“由……制成”（看出原料），类似结构的短语还有
be
made
from“由……制成”（看不出原料）
be
made
in
“某物生产于某地”
be
made
up
of“由……组成”
be
made
into“把……作成某产品”如：
The
table
is
made
of
wood.这张桌子是木头制成的。
Paper
is
made
from
wood.纸是木材做成的。
The
TV
set
is
made
in
Japan.这台电视机是日本产的。
The
medical
team
is
made
up
of
ten
doctors.这支医疗队由十位大夫组成。
Bamboo
can
be
made
into
walking
sticks
and
fishing
rods.
用竹子可以制成很好的拐杖和钓鱼竿。
2.The
weather
is
getting
warmer
and
warmer.天气变得越来越暖和了。
“比较级+and+比较级”表示“越来越……”如：
The
little
tree
is
getting
taller
and
taller.那棵小树越来越高了。
对于多音节的形容词或副词则这样表达more
and
more+adj/adv.如：
The
girl
becomes
more
and
more
beautiful.
那个女孩变得越来越漂亮了
3.We
can
get
cotton
from
plants
and
get
wool,
silk
and
leather
from
animals.
我们可以从植物中获得棉花，从动物中获得羊毛、丝绸和皮革。
get
sth
.from/sth./sb.从某事或某人处获得某物。
4.A…caught
her
eye.一个……引起了她的注意。如：catch
one’s
eye
意为“吸引某人的注意”如：
Can
you
catch
the
teacher’s
eye?

你能引起老师的注意吗？
5.What
the
people
there
wear
depends
on
their
likes
and
dislikes.
人们的衣着取决于他们的喜好。
depend
on
意为“依靠、依赖”如：
We
depend
on
our
hard
work.我们依靠我们的努力工作。
6.Some
people
prefer
to
dress
formally…一些人宁可打扮得正式些
prefer
宁肯，更喜欢……，
prefer
A
to
B
=
like
A
better
than
B
I
like
prefer
singing
=I
like
singing
better.我更喜欢唱歌。
I
prefer
swimming
to
skating.比起滑冰我更喜欢游泳。
7.While
many
South
American
people
have
the
same
way
of
dressing
as
Australia?
然而许多南美的人们和澳大利亚有相同的衣着方式。
While用于对比两件事物，意为“而……，然而……”
Michael
is
interested
in
music,
while
his
brother
prefers
P.E.
迈克对音乐感兴趣，而他的兄弟却更喜欢体育。
the
same…
as
和……一样/相同，反义词：be
different
from…与……不一样，如：
My
idea
is
the
same
as
yours,
but
it’s
different
from
his我的主意和你的一样，但和他的不一样。
8.People
first
started
wearing
clothes
to
protect
themselves
from
the
sun
,wind,
rain
and
cold.人们最早穿衣服是
为了保护他们不受日晒、风吹、雨打以及寒冷。
protect
…from
sth/doing
sth
阻止……做……
The
trees
can
protect
the
sand
from
moving.树可以防止沙子向前移。

Try
to
protect
your
skin
from
the
sun.尽量保护你的皮肤不受太阳暴晒。
三．
语法学习：感叹句
（1）感叹句用于表示说话时的一种较为强烈的感情。如：喜悦、赞叹、惊异、愤怒、厌恶等。感叹句的构成为“感叹部分+陈述部分+（主语+谓语）”，感叹部分由感叹词引导，陈述部分为整个感叹句的主语和谓语，句尾要用叹号“！”，读时要用降调。如：
What
a
nice
day
it
is
!多好的天气！
What
a
good
boy
he
is
!
多好的男孩！
How
silly
you
are
!
你真傻！
How
beautiful
it
is
!
它多美啊！

（2）感叹句的四种形式：
What
+a(an)+名词单数+主语+谓语
What
+形容词+可数名词复数/不可数名词+主语+谓语
How
+形容词+主语+be
How
+副词+主语+动词
（3）口语中，what或how引导的感叹句可省略主语+谓语。如：
What
an
interesting
book!
/How
interesting!
(
4)
what
与how引导的感叹句之间的转换。
What
a
beautiful
girl
she
is!=How
beautiful
the
girl
is!
How
delicious
the
food
is!=What
delicious
food
it
is!Topic2

What
would
you
like
to
wear
?
一．
重点词汇：
1.school
uniform校服
2.allow
sb.to
do
sth
允许某人做某事
3.make
a
survey
做调查
4.be
in
need在需要时
5.take
off
脱下，脱掉；起飞
6.on
every
occasion
在每一个场合
7.have
a
business
meeting
开商务会议
8.dress
for
为……穿衣服/打扮
9.in
fashion
流行，时尚
10.out
of
fashion
不流行，过时
11.advise
sb.(not)
to
do
sth.建议/劝告某人（不要）做某事
12.at
other
times
在其余的时候；有的时候
二．
重点句型：
1.I
don’t
like
uniform
because
they
will
so
ugly
on
us.
我不喜欢校服，因为我们穿了它看起来很丑。
look
so
ugly
on
us意为“穿在我们身上看起来很丑”
2.I
think
our
school
should
allow
us
to
design
our
own
uniform.

我认为我们的学校应该允许我们设计自己的校服。
allow“允许、许可”，allow
sb
.to
do
sth.“允许某人做某事”如：
Mr.Wang
allows
us
to
play
football.王老师允许我们踢足球。
3.They
are
good
for
patients.

他们对病人有好处。
be
good
for
对……有益，be
bad
for
对……有坏处，be
good
at
擅长于
4.Second,patients
can
find
easily
when
they
are
in
need.
第二，当病人需要我们时，会很容易地找到我们。
be
in
need
“需要”，与
need同义。如：
When
you
are
in
need,
you
can
call
me.当你在需要的时候，你可以打电话给我。
5.You
should
take
off
your
shoes
when
you
enter
someone’s
home
in
Japan.

当你进入日本人家的时候，必须先脱掉鞋子。
take
off意为“脱下，脱掉”，反义词组是put
on.
take
off还可表示“起飞”
The
plane
will
take
off
in
an
hour.飞机将在一小时内起飞。
6.But
now
,most
of
us
can
dress
for
ourselves.
但是现在我们大多数人都可以自己打扮。
dress
for“为……穿衣服”
put
on“穿（戴）上”的动作，反义词take
off
wear,
have
…on,
be
on…“穿（戴）着”的状态。
dress
sb./oneself“给别人/自己穿衣服，dress
up“穿上盛穿、乔装打扮”
dress后不能接“衣服”类的词作宾语。
7.It’s
well-known
that
uniforms
are
not
popular
but
useful.
众所周知，制服不流行但有用。
①It’s
well-
known…意为“众所周知”如：
It’s
well-
known
that
this
song
is
very
popular.
众所周知，这首歌很流行。
②not…but…
不是……而是……
He
isn’t
a
teacher
but
a
doctor.他不是一个老师而是一个医生。
三．
语法学习：

①
跟to
do的动词口诀
希望想学就同意，
(hope,
wish,
would
like,
want,
learn,
agree)
需要决定选to
do。
(need,
decide,
choose)
开始喜欢又讨厌，
(begin,
start,
like,
prefer,
love,
hate)
to
do,
doing意无别。
忘、记停止继续试。
(forget,
remember,
stop,
go
on,
try)to
do意不同。
命令警告邀人教，
(order
,warn,
ask,
tell,
invite,
teach
sb
.to
do)
希望要让别人做。
(wish,want,
would
like,
get,
allow
sb
.to
do)
五看三使役，
(see,
look
at,
watch,
notice,
observe,
make,
let,
have)
二听一感半帮助，
(hear,
listen
to;
feel;
(to)help)
主动to字要离去，被动to字要回府。
②
跟do的动词口诀
听观感使让帮请最好不带to，为什么不呢？
(hear,
listen
to
,
see,
look
at,
watch,
notice,
feel,
make,
let,
have,
help,
please,
had
better,
why
not)
Topic3
Let’s
go
to
see
the
fashion
show
一．
重点词汇：
1.
fashion
show时装表演/时装秀
2.
T-shaped
stag

T型台
3.
in
the
center
of
在……的中心
4.
high
fashion高级时尚
5.
in
the
world
of
在……领域
6.
wedding
dress
婚纱
7.stand
for

代表
8.get
one’s
name
得名
9.be
known
to为……所知
10.be
designed
as
以……来设计
11.except
for
除……之外
二.重点句型：1.There
is
going
to
be
a
fashion
show
in
fashion
show
in
Xidan
Shopping
center.
在西单购物中心将会有一场时装秀。There
is
going
to
be…是There
be结构的将来时,表示某地将举行某项运动，或将有某物。如：There
is
going
to
be
a
football
match
in
our
school
next
week.=There
will
be
a
football
match
in
our
school
next
week.我们学校下周将有一场足球比赛。
there
is/are
going
to
be=there
will
be
2.
Here
come
the
models.
模特走过来了。
（1）英语中以here或there开头的句子要倒装，除主语是代词外，动词要放在主语之前。
如：Here
come
Mary!
玛丽来了！
Here
come
the
bus!
车来了！
(2)主语若是人称代词时，主语和谓语的语序不变。
如：Here
she
comes.她来了。
Here
it
is.它在这儿。
3.
The
Tang
costume
stands
for
Chinese
history
and
fashion
culture.
唐装代表着中国的历史和服装文化。
stand
for意为“代表”，如：It
stands
for
Olympics.它代表着奥林匹克。
4.
The
so-called
Tang
costume
got
its
name
because
China
became
known
to
other
countries
during
the
Han
and
Tang
Dynasties.所谓的唐装是因为中国在汉、唐时期开始文明于世而得名。
（1）so-called所谓的
（2）get
one’s
name得名
如：The
village
got
its
name
from
the
lake
in
it.这个村庄因村内的湖泊而得名。

5.
Chinese
fashion
is
different
from
not
only
western
fashion,
but
also
fashion
from
other
Asian
countries
such
as
Japan
and
Korea.中国时装不仅不同于西方国家，也有别于其他亚洲国家，如日本和韩国等。
（1）
be
different
from与……不同
（2）not
only
…but
also意为“不但……而且”
（3）such
as例如，比如说
6.
Today
the
Tang
costume
can
be
designed
as
formal
or
casual
clothes.现在唐装被设计成有正式款的，也有休闲款的。
be
designed
as被设计成

如：They
decided
that
the
theater
will
be
designed
as
a
palace.他们决定把那个剧院设计成宫殿模样。
7.
Today,few
people
wear
kimonos
except
for
special
occasions
like
weddings
and
national
celebrations.
except
for除……之外

如：The
roads
were
clear
except
for
a
few
cars.
除了几辆小汽车外，马路上空荡荡的。
三．语法学习：跟doing的动词口诀

怎样善于做贡献？（What/how
about
doing
,
be
good
at/do
well
in
doing,
make
a
contribution
to
doing）
阻止他人放弃练。(stop/prevent
/
keep
sb
.from
doing,
give
up
doing,
practice
doing)
有难宁可不介意,（have
problems
doing,
prefer
doing
sth./to
doing
sth,
mind
doing）
建议花时忙完成。(suggest
doing,
spend
doing,
be
busy
doing,
finish
doing)
使人不禁有信心，(keep
sb.
doing
sth.,
can’t
help
doing
,
have
confidence
in
doing)
继续展望想未来。（keep/keep
on
doing,
look
forward
to
doing,
feel
like
doing）
惊喜满意又兴奋，（be
amazed/surprised
at
doing,
be
pleased/satisfied
with
doing,

be
excited
about
doing）
牢记doing值得喜洋洋。
(be
worth
doing,
enjoy
doing,
have
fun
doing)mood
feeling
spirit
emotion有什么区别
这四个词语虽然都有“情绪，情感”的意思，但各自的侧重点不同，因而构成不同的短语，考试一般会考查它们各自组成的短语。
mood侧重
“心情，情绪”，一般用于以下短语
bad
mood
坏心情，坏情绪
in
the
mood
兴致勃勃
in
a
good
mood
心情好，好心情
in
a
bad
mood
心情不好；处在不好的情绪中
如：He
is
in
a
good
mood
because
of
the
pleasant
weather.
因为是好天气，他的心情很好。
feeling
侧重“感觉，触觉；感情，情绪”
，是自己内心深处真实的感觉
如：A
feeling
of
shame
came
over
her.她突然产生一种害羞的感觉。
spirit
侧重“(相对于肉体而言的)精神；心，心灵”

如：What
a
noble
spirit
this
is!

这是多么高尚的精神!
emotion
侧重“内心的情感”，常用于以下短语：
with
emotion
激动地；感动地
emotion
quotient
(EQ)
情商
emotion
quotient
(eq)
情商
如：Don"t
hold
your
emotion
in,
cry
if
you
want
to.
别抑制你的情感，想哭你就哭一通吧。仁爱英语九年级上册知识点
Unit
1:
The
Changing
World
Topic
1
China
has
developed
rapidly
in
recent
years.
一、
重点词汇
（一）
词形转换
1.
training
(动词)
train“训练”

2.
whole
(同音词)
hole
3.
tidy
(近义词)
clean
4.
develop
(名词)
development（形容词）developed“发达的”;
developing“发展中的”
5.
rapid
(副词)
rapidly
6.
old
(比较级)
older;
elder

7.
recent
(副词)
recently
8.
narrow
(反义词)
wide9.
title
(近义词)
subject
(二)
重点短语
1.
have
a
good
summer
holiday
过一个愉快的暑假
2.
come
back
from…
从……回来
3.
work
for
…
为……工作
4.
feel
sorry
for…

对……深表同情
5.
a
disabled
children’s
home
一家残疾儿童养育院
6.
the
whole
holiday
整个假期
7.
tell
stories
to
kids
给小孩讲故事
8.
learn…from
从……当中学习
9.
feed
a
child
喂小孩
10.
do
farm
work干农活
11.
go
to
summer
classes
上暑期班
12.
write
an
article
about…写一篇有关……的文章
13.
have
a
hard/
happy
life
过着艰苦的/
幸福的生活
14.
in
the
past/
future
在过去/
在将来
15.
in
detail
详细地
16.
at
sunrise在日出时
17.
have
no
chance
to
do
sth.

没有机会做某事
18.
afford
(
to
do)
sth
担负得起(做)某事
19.
give
support
to
sb.给某人帮助/支持
20.
get
a
good
education
获得良好的教育
21.
search…for…为了……搜索……
22.
have
little
food
to
eat
吃不饱
23.
dress
warmly穿得暖
24.
with
the
development
of…
随着……的发展
25.
have
a
balanced
diet
饮食均衡
26.
play
musical
instruments
演奏乐器
27.
sleep
in
the
open
air
在户外睡觉
28.
study/
go
abroad
在国外学习/
出国
29.
enter/
win/
lose
a
competition

参加/
赢得/
输掉比赛
30.
enjoy
Beijing
Opera
欣赏京剧
31.
used
to
do
sth.

过去常做某事
32.
at
sunrise

在日出时

33.
go
hungry
变饿了
34.
fall
ill
得病/
患病
35.
divide
…into…
把……分成……
36.
feel
satisfied
with…
对……感到满足
37.
see
….
oneself

亲眼看见……
38.
make
progress

取得进步
39.
thanks
to

多亏;
幸亏；由于
40.
stand
for

代表
41.
with
the
help
of…在……的帮助下
42.
draw
up
an
outline

拟定提纲
三、重点句型
1.
You
have
just
come
back
from
your
hometown.
你刚刚从你的家乡返回。
2.
There
goes
the
bell.=
The
bell
is
ringing.
铃响了。
3.
Have
you
spent
the
whole
holiday
working
here?
你整个暑期都在那里工作吗？
4.
Is
that
so?
真是那样吗？
5.
Can
you
describe
it
in
detail?
你能详细地说说吗？
6.
Our
job
was
to
grow
cotton.（作表语）我的工作是种植棉花。
7.
I
had
to
divide
my
money
into
two
parts.
我不得不把钱分成两份。
8.
He
has
seen
the
changes
in
Beijing
himself.
他亲眼目睹了北京的变化。
9.
I
think
it
is
important
to
remember
the
past,
live
in
the
present
and
dream
about
the
future.
我认为记住过去、立足现在、展望未来非常重要。
10．Thanks
to
/
Because
of
the
government’s
efforts.由于政府的努力。
四、重点知识点
1.
Though
I
had
no
time
to
travel,
I
still
felt
very
happy
this
holiday!

尽管我没时间去旅游，但这个假期我仍然感到很愉快。
though
从属连词，用来引导让步状语从句，表“虽然；尽管”，不能与but连用。如：
Though
he
is
poor,
he
is
happy.
=
He
is
poor,
but
he
is
happy.
尽管他很贫穷，但是他很快乐。
2.
Could
you
please
tell
me
something
about
Chinese
teenagers?
请告诉我一些有关中国青少年的一些事情好吗？
Could
/Would
you
please
(not)
do
sth？
请（不）做某事好吗？
如：
Could
you
please
turn
down
your
radio?
请把收音机声音调低好吗？
Would
you
please
not
play
football
here?
请不要在这儿踢球好吗？
3.
Parents
couldn’t
afford
education
for
their
children.
父母供不起孩子上学。
afford
常与can,
could
或
be
able
to
连用，尤其用于否定句或疑问句，表“负担得起（做）某事；抽得出（时间）”
“(can’t/
couldn’t)
afford
(to
do)
sth.”
如：
We
can’t
afford
(to
buy
)
this
house
because
we
don’t
have
enough
money.
我们买不这房了，因为我们没有足够的钱。
He
felt
he
couldn’t
afford
any
time
to
play
football.
他觉得自己没有时间踢球了。
4.
Our
government
gives
support
to
poor
families.
我们的政府能为贫困家庭提供帮助。
give
support
to
sb.=
give
sb.
support
为某人提供帮助/
支持
support作动词时表“供养；支持；支撑”，如：

She
had
to
support
her
family
at
the
age
of
ten.
她十岁时就得养家。
His
parents
supported
him
in
his
decision.他的父母支持他的决定。
The
two
sticks
support
the
tree.
两根木棍支撑着这棵树。
5.
Why
not
go
and
search
the
Internet
for
some
information?
为什么不上网查找相关信息呢？
search
sp.
for
sth.
搜查某地寻找某物
search
sb.
for
sth.
搜身查找某物
search
for
sth./
sb.=
look
for
sth./
sb.
搜寻某物/
某人；
如：
The
villagers
searched
the
woods
for
the
lost
children.村民们在树林里寻找失踪的孩子们。

The
police
searched
the
man
for
the
stolen
money.
警察搜那个男人的身，查找被偷的钱。He
is
searching/
looking
for
his
missing
keys.
他在寻找他丢的钥匙。
6.
I
used
to
be
a
chilld
laborer.
我以前是一个童工。
used
to
be/
do…

过去曾是/常做……
be
used
to
do
sth.
=
be
used
for
doing
sth.
被用来做某事
be/
get
used
to
(doing
)
sth.
习惯于（做）某事；
如：
I
used
to
be
a
Chinese
teacher.
我过去曾是一名语文老师。
I
used
to
swim
in
this
river.
我过去常在这条河中游泳。
Knives
are
used
to
cut
things.=
knives
are
used
for
cutting
things.
刀子被用砍东西。
We
are
used
to
getting
up
earlier
now.
现在我们习惯于早起。
7.
We
often
went
hungry
because
the
boss
didn’t
give
us
enough
food
to
eat.

我们经常挨饿，因为老板不给我们足够的食物。
在这里是系动词，表“变得…”,后跟形容词,构成系表结构.
如:
The
food
on
the
table
went
bad.
桌面上的食物变坏了.

8.
One
part
was
used
to
help
support
my
family,
to
help
send
my
elder
brother
to
school.
一部分钱用来供养全家人,另一部分用来供哥哥上学.
a)
one
part…the
other
(part)
…一部分……另一部分……
b)
elder
brother
哥哥
elder
作形容词时,
是old的比较级,
一般表示家庭成员出生的顺序,在句中只能作定语,可与than连用;
而older表年龄的比较,可与
than连用.
如:
His
elder
sister
is
two
older
than
he.
他的姐姐比他大两岁.
作名词时,
表
“
长者;
前辈;
祖先”,
如:
Their
customs
were
handed
down
by
the
elders.

他们的风俗习惯是由他们的祖先传下来的.
9.
But
China
has
developed
rapidly
in
recent
years.
但是近年来,中国发展迅速.
in
recent
years
表
“近年来”,常与完成时连用.
如:
She
has
learnt
a
lot
of
knowledge
in
recent
years.
近年来,她学到了许多知识.
10.
China
has
made
such
rapid
progress.
中国已经取得如此迅速的进步。
progress
为不可数名词

make
progress
取得进步
make
some/
much/
great
progress
取得一些/
许多/
巨大的进步

11.
What
has
happened
to
Beijing’s
roads
now?
现在北京的公路发生了什么变化？

sth.
happen
to
sb.
某人发生了某事
，
如：
If
anything
happens
to
him,
let
me
know.
万一他有什么不测，就请通知我。
A
little
accident
happened
to
her
yesterday.
昨天她发生了点小意外。

12.
They
express
the
rich
culture
of
China
as
well.
他们也表达了丰富的中国文化。

as
well,
too,
also均表“也；又”；

as
well
多用于口语，只用于句末，不用逗号隔开；

too
多用于口语，用于句末，要用逗号隔开；

also
较正式，不用于句末；

either
用于否定句，表“也不”，与too
对应。
如：

He
likes
sports
as
well.
=
He
likes
sports,
too.
=
He
also
likes
sports.
他也喜欢运动。

He
didn’t
come,
either.
他也没来。
五、重点语法
（一）现在完成时：表示过去已经发生或已经完成的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果。
即“过去的动作
+
现在的结果”，
强调结果。如：

I
have
bought
a
new
bike.
(=
I
bought
a
new
bike,
and
I
have
a
new
bike
now.)
我已经买了一辆新的自行车。（强调我现在有了一辆新车。）

构成形式：
助动词have
/
has
+
动词的过去分词
1．肯定句：
I
have
seen
the
film.
我已经看过这部电影。
否定句：
I
haven’t
seen
the
film.

我没看过这部电影。
一般疑问句：
Have
you
seen
the
film?
你看过这部电影了吗？
回答：

Yes,
I
have.
是的，我看过了。No,
I
haven’t.
不，我没看过。
特殊疑问句：
What
have
you
done?你已经做了什么？
2．肯定句：
He
has
finished
the
task.
他已经完成了任务。
否定句：
He
hasn’t
finished
the
task.他还没有完成任务。
一般疑问句：
Has
he
finished
the
task?
他已经完成任务了吗？
回答：

Yes,
he
has.
是的，他完成了。No,
he
hasn’t.
不，他没有完成。
特殊疑问句：
What
has
he
finished?
他完成了什么？
（二）have/
has
been
to与
have/
has
gone
to
have/
has
been
to
+
某地，
到过某地，说话时人已经回来了。
have
/has
gone
to
+
某地，
说明去了某地，
说话时人还没回来。
如：
I
have
been
to
Beijing
twice.
他去过北京两次。
----
Where
is
Jim?
吉姆在哪儿？
----
He
has
gone
to
the
library?
他去图书馆了。
Topic
2
What
has
happened
to
the
population?
一、重点词汇
（一）词形转换

1.
possible
(反义词)
impossible
2.
rise
(过去分词)
rose

3.
conclude
(名词)
conclusion
4.
medicine
(形容词)
medical5.
difficult
(名词)
difficulty6.
less
(反义词)
more

7.
excellent
(近义词)
great/
good

8.
different
(名词)
difference9.
come
(过去式)
came
(过去分词)
come
10.
see
(过去式)
saw
(过去分词)
seen

11.
peace
(形容词)
peaceful
（二）重点短语
1.
get
lost
走失；迷路
2.
hate
to
go
shopping讨厌去购物
3.
hear
from
sb.=receive/
get
a
letter
from
sb.
收到某人的来信
4.
be
abroad在国外
5.
at
least
至少
6.
take
place
=
happen发生
7.
China’s
one-child
policy中国的独生子女政策
8.
be
strict
with
sb.
对某人要求严格
9.
the
population
of
China中国的人口
10.
live
longer

活得更长
11.
medical
care
医疗保健
12.
control
the
population
控制人口
13.
be
known
/
famous
as
以……而闻名
14.
work
well
in
doing
sth.
在做某事方面很有功效
15.
have
a
long
way
to
go
有很长的路要走
16.
be
short
of

缺乏……
17.
one
of
the
greatest
problems
最大的问题之一
18.
be
in
trouble
陷入麻烦中/
在困境中
19.
prefer
boys
to
girls重男轻女
20.
offer
sb.
a
good
education
提供某人良好的教育
21.
a
couple
of
一些
;几个
22.
even
though
=
even
if
即使
23.
have
a
lot
of
pressure
有许多压力
24.
the
differences
between
A
and
B
A与B之间的区别
二、
重点句型
1.
We
got
lost
and
couldn’t
find
each
other.
我们走失了，互相找不到对方。
2.
It
seems
that
their
living
conditions
were
not
very
good.
似乎他们的生活条件不是很好。
3.
It
is
possible
that
Kangkang’s
father
was
the
only
child
in
his
family.
康康的父亲有可能是他家中的独生子。
4.
One
answer
is
known
as
the
one-child
policy.
其中一项众所周知的措施是独生子女政策.
5.
And
even
though
we
have
made
a
lot
of
progress,
we
have
big
pollution
problems
in
the

city.
虽然我们已经取得了很大的进步，但是仍存在严重的城市污染问题。
三、重点语言点
1．
----
I
really
hate
to
go
shopping.
我真讨厌去购物。
----
So
do
I
.
我也是。
So
do
I
.为倒装句，表示前面提到的肯定情况也同样适合另外一个主体，表“某某也一样”，结构为“so
+
be
/情态动词/
助动词
+
主语”。
如：
Jim
is
a
student,
so
is
Tom.
吉姆是一名学生，汤姆也是。
Jim
can
swim,
so
can
Tom.
吉姆会游泳，汤姆也会。
Jim
likes
sports,
so
does
Tom.
吉姆喜欢运动，汤姆也喜欢。
如表前面不怎样，后面“也不”怎样时，其结构为“
neither/
nor
+
be
/情态动词/
助动词
+
主语”。
如：Jim
wasn’t
Chinese,
neither/
nor
were
they.　吉姆不中国人，他们也不是。Jim
can’t
speak
Japanese,
neither
can
I
.　吉姆不会说日语，我也不会。Jim
didn’t
go
there,
neither
did
I
.　吉姆没去那儿，我也没去。
　如前后两句表达的是同一个主体，则不能倒装，表“的确如此”。如：Jim
is
a
good
student.
So
he
is.
吉姆是一名好学生，的确如此。Jim
swims
well.
So
he
does.
吉姆游泳很好，的确如此。
2．At
that
time,
China
was
the
country
with
the
largest
population
in
the
world.那时，中国是世界上人口最多的国家。
population为不可数名词，表示人口的多少只能用
“large”或
“small”修饰，提问人口用“what”,
如：
The
population
of
Shanghai
is
larger
than
that
of
Beijing.
上海的人口比北京多。
What’s
the
population
of
China?=
How
many
people
are
there
in
China?

中国的人口有多少？
3.
Great
changes
have
taken
place
in
China.
中国发生了巨大变化。
take
place
指必然性的“发生”或有计划、安排之内的“举行”。如：
The
meeting
will
take
place
next
Friday.
会议将在下周五举行。
happen
指偶然的、没有预料的“发生“，其结果往往给人带来不幸或麻烦。如：
The
accident
happened
yesterday.
事故发生在昨天。
※两者都不用于被动语态。
4.
The
population
has
increased
a
lot.
人口增长发很多。
increase
可作及物动词也可作不及物动词。其含义是“增长，增加，加强”等。
increase
by…
指“增加了……”;
increase
to…指
“增加到……”
5.
…,
and
about
one
fifth
of
the
people
in
the
world
live
in
China.

而且世界上大约五分之一的人口生活在中国。

one
fifth
是分数表达法。英文分数表达法：分子为基数词，分母为序数词，先读分子后读分母。当分子大于1时，分母的序数词则变为复数，直接在词尾加“s”。如：
one
fourth
四分之一；three
fourths四分之三；
one
second二分之一；two
thirds
三分之二

6．It
has
worked
well
in
controlling
China’s
population.

它在控制人口数量方面取得了显著的功效。
work
well
in
doing
sth.
表“在……方面很有功效”,
如:
Doing
eye
exercises
works
well
in
protecting
our
eyesight.
做眼保健操在保护视力方面很有功效。
7.
Because
of
our
large
population,
we
are
short
of
energy
and
water.
be
short
of…
表
“缺乏……”,
如:
She
is
always
short
of
money
at
the
end
of
every
month.
每个月底她总是缺钱。
be
short
for…
表“是……的缩写”,
如:
TV
is
short
for
television.TV是television的缩写形式.
8.
Can
all
Chinese
families
offer
their
children
a
good
education?

所有的中国家庭都能给他们的的孩子提供良好的教育吗？
offer
表“（主动）给予，
提供”
offer
sb.
sth.
“提供某人某物”
如：
I
offered
him
a
glass
of
wine.

我敬了他一杯酒。
offer
to
do
sth.
“（主动）提出做某事”
如：
She
offered
to
cook
for
her
mother.
她提出帮她妈妈煮饭。
9.
I
can’t
go
shopping
in
big
stores
unless
I
travel
for
a
couple
of
hours.
我得花几个小时，才能到大的商场购物。
a)
unless
=
if
not
表“除非…;
如果不”，引导条件状语从句。如：
I
won’t
go
unless
I
hear
from
you.
=
I
won’t
go
if
I
don’t
hear
from
you.如果你不通知我，我就不去。
Unless
Bill
studies
hard,
he’ll
fail
in
the
exam.
如果比尔不努力,
他不会通过考试的.
b)
a
couple
of…
表
“几个人或几件事”,
如:
a
couple
of
years
ago几年前;

a
couple
of
students几个学生
couple
指任何两件同类的东西;
如:

a
couple
of
watches
两只手表；
five
couples
of
cats
五对猫
pair
指两件不可分开使用的东西,它们可指两件互不相连的东西(鞋子、袜子等)，也可指两部分构成的一件东西（裤子、剪刀等）。如：
a
pair
of
shoes
一双鞋子
a
pair
of
pants
一条裤子
四、重点语法
现在完成时常与下列表不明确的状语连用：
1．already
和
yet
already
“已经”（多用于肯定陈述句），如：
He
has
already
gone
home.
他已经回家了。
yet
“已经;
还”（用于否定句或疑问句），如：
Have
you
found
him
yet?
你已经找到他了吗？
I
haven’t
finished
my
homework
yet.
我还没完成作业。
※
already
也可用于疑问句，表“出乎意料或惊奇”
Have
you
finished
your
homework
already?

难道你已经完成作业了？
2．ever
和
never
ever
“曾经”（多用于疑问句，问初次经历），如：
I
have
ever
been
abroad.

我曾出过国。
never
never“从未；从来不”（多用于否定陈述句），常回答ever的句型。如：
I
have
never
seen
him
before.
----Has
he
ever
been
abroad?
他曾出过国吗？
----No,
never.
不，从来不。
3．just

just
“刚刚”（多用于肯定句，位于谓语动词之前），如：I
have
just
tried
to
call
you.
我刚刚打电话给你。
4．before
before
“之前”（一般位于句末；常与never呼应），
如：
He
says
he
has
never
seen
such
beautiful
scenery
before.

他说他以前从来没看过这么美的风景。Topic
3
The
world
has
changed
for
the
better.
一、重点词汇
（一）
词形转换1.
homeless(名词)
homelessness
2．fair
(反义词)
unfair
3.
disobey
(反义词)
obey
4.
succeed
(名词)
success
(形容词)
successful
5.
excited
(动词)
excite6.
French
(国家)
France
(公民)

Frenchman

（二）
重点短语
1.
help
homeless
people帮助无家可归的人
2.
in
need

需要（食物和钱）
3.
decide
on
(doing
)
sth.

决定（做）某事
4.
provide
sb.
with
sth.
给某人提供某物
5.
come
for
a
visit
来参观；来看一看
6.
be
successful
in
(doing)
sth.
成功地做了某事
7.
get/find
jobs

获得/
找到工作
8.
feel
good
about
oneself
自我感觉良好
9.
take
drugs
吸毒
10.
give
sb.
a
good
chance
to
do
sth.

给某人做某事的一次好机会
11.
end
the
war结束战争
12.
live
a
happy
life过着幸福的生活
13.
smile
on
one’s
face
脸上露出笑容
14.
Project
Hopes
希望工程
15.
at
home
and
abroad
在国内外
16.
in
poor
areas

在贫困地区
17.
receive
a
good
education
受到良好的教育
二、重点句型
1.
It
trains
them
so
that
they
can
find
jobs
again.
培训他们以便他们能再次找到工作。
2.
I
think
it
is
important
for
these
people
to
feel
good
about
themselves.

我认为对于这些人来说自我感觉良好是很重要的。
3.
…,
you
will
get
used
to
it.
…你会习惯它的。
4.
You
must
come
for
a
visit.
你一定来参观一下。
5.
Then
you
can
see
New
York
for
yourself.
然后你可以自己看一看纽约。
6.
If
anyone
takes
drugs
or
disobey
the
other
rules,
he
can’t
stay
in
the
program.
如果有人吸毒或者违反其它规定，他就不可以呆在培训中心。
7.
The
money
is
used
for
children’s
education
in
poor
area.
这些资金被用来资助贫困地区儿童接受教育的。
8.
With
the
money,
it
has
built
thousands
of
schools
and
libraries
and
trained
2300
teachers.
利用这些钱，希望工程建立了数以千计的学校和图书馆并且培养了2300名老师。
三、重点语言点

1.
Well,
once
they
find
people
in
need,
they
decide
on
suitable
ways
to
help
them.
他们一旦发现有人需要帮助，就选定适当的方式来帮助他们。
a)
once
是从属连词，表“一旦……就……”,它的从句为现在时态(包括一般现在时、现在进行时、现在完成时)，主句则为一般将来时。或者主从句均为过去的某种时态。如：
Once
you
become
interested
in
playing
computer
games,
you’ll
have
trouble
giving
them
up.
一旦你迷上了电脑游戏，你就很难放弃它。
Once
he
arrives
here,
he
will
know
the
whole
thing.
一旦他到这儿，他就会知道整件事的。
She
told
him
once
she
arrived,
she
would
call
him.
她告诉他一旦她到了，她会打电话给他。
b)
decide
on
(doing
)
sth.
决定（做）某事，
相当于
decide
to
do
sth.
如：
They
decided
on
spending
the
holiday
in
Hainan.
他们决定在海南度假。
=
They
decided
to
spend
the
holiday
in
Hainan.

2.
The
government
provides
homeless
people
with
nice
homes.

政府向无家可归的人们提供舒适的住处。
provide
sb.
with
sth.
=
provide
sth.
for
sb.
提供给某人某物
The
school
provided
the
students
with
food.
这所学校为学生们提供食物。
=
The
school
provided
food
for
the
students.
3.
I
think
it’s
a
wonderful
place
to
live
in.
我认为那是一个居住的好地方。to
live
in
是动词不定式，用来修饰前面的名词place.
在不定式中，如动词为不及物动词，或者不定式所修饰的名词或代词是不定式动作的地点、工具等，不定式后必须跟上相应的介词。
如：There
is
nothing
to
worry
about.
没有什么可担心的事。I
need
a
pen
to
write
with.
我需要一只笔写字。
4.
It
is
famous
because
it
has
been
so
successful
in
helping
homeless
people
return
to
normal
lives.它很出名是因为它已经成功地帮助无家可归的人重新过上正常的生活。be
successful
in
doing
sth.
成功地做成某事，
相当于
succeed
in
doing
sth.
如：He
was
successful
in
passing
the
exam.
他成功地通过了考试。They
were
successful
in
climbing
Mount
Huang.
他们成功地登上了黄山。
5．In
the
past
sixteen
years,
Project
Hope
has
raised
about
3
billion
yuan.
在近十六年来，希望工程已筹集了大约30亿元。
in
the
past
+
若干时间，表“近若干时间来”，用于现在完成时。如：
They
have
learnt
about
500
English
words
in
the
past
two
months.

近两个月来，他们已经学习了大约500个英语单词。
You
have
grown
up
a
lot
in
the
past
three
years.
近三年来，你们长大了许多。
四、重点语法

（一）
直接引语和间接引语在引用别人原话时，被引用的部分称为直接引语；如：

“What
are
you
reading,Jane?”
Maria
asked.
当用自己的话转述别人的话时，被转述部分称为间接引语。如：
Maria
asked
Jane
what
she
was
reading.
直接引语和间接引语可互相转换，但要注意以下几个变化：
1．
直接引语变为间接引语时，引导词要根据句子类型的不同有所变化。
1）如果直接引语是陈述句，变成间接引语时，引导词用that或省略。如：
She
said,
“I’m
very
glad
to
have
such
a
chance.”
→She
said
(that)
she
was
very
glad
to
have
such
a
chance.
2）如果是一般疑问句时，则用whether或
if。如：
Maria
asked
Jane,
“Can
they
get
good
food
and
medicine?”
→Maria
asked
Jane
whether/
if
they
could
get
good
food
and
medicine.
3）如果是特殊疑问句时，则用相应的疑问词what,
where,
which,
how等。如：
Maria
asked
Jane,
“
What
are
you
reading?”
→Maria
asked
Jane
what
she
was
reading.
4）如果是祈使句时，则多用动词ask,
tell,
order引导的不定式结构。如：
Mother
said
to
me,
“
Try
again.”→
Mother
asked
me
to
try
again.
“
Don’t
be
afraid”,
Tom
said
to
Dick.→Tom
told
Dick
not
to
be
afraid.
2．
语序的变化：若是从句，一律为陈述语序。
3．
时态的变化。
1）主句为现在或将来时态时，间接引语的时态不变；如：
He
says,
“I’m
tired.”→
He
says
he
is
tired.
He
will
say,
“
The
boy
was
lazy.”→
He
will
say
the
boy
was
lazy.
2）主句为过去时态时，间接引语则一般都有改成相应的过去时态，但表示自然科学和真理之类的仍以现在时出现。如：
He
said,
“I’m
sorry.”→
He
said
he
was
sorry.
The
teacher
told
us,
“The
earth
moves
around
the
sun.”
→
The
teacher
told
us
the
earth
moves
around
the
sun.
4．
人称的变化。如：
The
teacher
said,
“John,
you
must
bring
your
book
to
the
class.”
→
The
teacher
told
John
that
he
must
bring
his
book
to
the
class.
5．
时间状语的变化。如：now→then;
today→that
day;
tonight→that
night;

this
morning→that
morning;

ago→before;yesterday→the
day
before;
last
night→the
night
before;the
day
before
yesterday→two
days
before;
tomorrow→the
next
day;

next
week→the
next
week.
6．
地点状语的变化。如：here→there

7．
指示代词的变化。如：this→that;
these
→
those
8．
动词的变化。如：come
→
go;
bring
→
take
（二）构词法
1.
合成词：由两个或者更多独立的单词组合成一个单词。

如：
motherland,
basketball,
filmmaker,
birthday;
hometown,
greenhouse,
etc.
2.
派生词：一词通过加前缀或后缀构成一个新词。
如：
1）常见的前缀：
dis-;
un-;
im-
表示“不”，
如：
dislike（不喜欢）
disappear（消失）

disagree
（不同意）disobey（不遵守）
unhappy（不快乐）
unfair（不公平）

unlike（不像）

unfriendly（不友好）
impolite
（不礼貌）
impossible（不可能）
re-
表示“重复”，
如：
retell（复述）
review（复习）

rewrite（重写）return（重返）
super-
表示“超”，
如：
supermarket（超市）
superman（超人）
superstar（超级明星）
mis-
表示“错误”，
如：
mistake（错误）misunderstand（误解）
2)
常见的后缀：
名词后缀：-er,
-or;
-ness;
-tion;
-
ment如：
worker（工人）
player（选手）
teacher（教师）driver（司机）
visitor
（参观者）
inventor（发明者）
translator
（翻译者）
question（问题）
invention
（发明）education
（教育）

organization（组织）
movement（运动
）agreement（同意）
development（发展）
形容词后缀：-ful;
-ous;

-less-
able;

-y
如：
useful
（有用的）
careful（认真的）
helpful
（有帮助的）
successful（成功的）
dangerous（危险的）
famous
（著名的）

delicious
（可口的）
serious（严肃的）
homeless
（无家可归的）

careless（粗心的）
useless（无用的）
changeable
（易变的）
countable（可数的）
cloudy
（多云的）windy
（有风的）

sleepy（困倦的）
rainy（下雨的）Unit
2

Saving
the
earth

Topic
1
I
can’t
stand
the
environment
here.
一、重点词汇
（一）
词形变换1.
produce(名词)
producer

2.
breathe
(名词)
breath
3.
manage
(同义词)
try4.
soil
(近义词)
earth

5.
waste
(反义词)
save

6.
harm
(形容词)
harmful7.
die
(名词)
death
(形容词)
dead

8.
downstairs
(反义词)
upstairs
9.pleasant
(反义词)
unpleasant
10.
change
(形容词)
changeable
（二）
重点词组
1.
stand
/improve
/
protect
the
environment
忍受/改善/保护环境

2.
produce
terrible
gas

产生难闻的气味
3.
manage
to
do
sth.
设法做某事
4.
in
a
good
/
bad
mood
情绪好/差
5.
feel
uncomfortable感到不舒适
6.
pour
waste
into
river
把废水倒入河里
7.
something
useful
有用的事物
8.
be
harmful
to
sb.
/
sth.
对某人/某物有害
9.
the
look
of
our
cities
城市面貌
10.
see
fish
swimming看到鱼儿游来游去
11.
at
present

目前
12.
shout
at
sb.
对某人大喊大叫；斥责某人
13.
stop
making
so
much
noise
停止发出如此大的噪音
14.
disturb
others打扰别人
15.
a
kind
of
pollution一种污染
16.
be
sorry
for
doing
sth.
对做了某事感到抱歉
17.
from
now
on从现在起
18.
in
noisy
conditions

在吵杂的条件下
19.
become
deaf变聋了
20.
quite
a
few
相当多
21.
no
better
than

（几乎）与……一样差
22.
cause
high
blood
pressure
引发高血压
23.
in
strong,
changeable
light
在强烈、易变的光线下
二、
重点句型。
1.
It
is
difficult
for
me
to
breathe.对我来说很难呼吸。
2.
----How
long
have
you
been
like
this?
你处于这样的状态多久了？
----I
have
been
like
this
since
last
month.
自从上个月以来我一直这样。3.
It
is
a
beautiful
place
with
flowers
and
grass.
那是个有花、有草的美丽的地方。
4.
All
the
flowers,
grass
and
fish
have
gone!
所有的花、草和鱼儿都没有了！
5.
It
smells
terrible.
难闻极了。
6.
There
are
several
chemical
factories
pouring
waste
water
into
the
river.有几座工厂正往河里排放污水。
7.
It’s
our
duty
to
protect
the
environment.
保护环境是我们的职责。
8.
I
have
been
at
this
school
since
last
year
/
for
one
year.

自从去年，我在这个学校了。
/
我来到这个学校有一年了。
9.
Noise
is
a
kind
of
pollution
and
it
is
harmful
to
our
ears.

噪音是一种污染，对我们的耳朵有害。
三、重点语言点
1.
I
can’t
stand
the
environment
here.
我无法容忍这儿的环境。
stand
表“容忍；忍受”，后接名词、代词及动名词做宾语。
如：
I
can’t
stand
that
man,
he
talks
too
much.

我忍受不了那个人了，他话太多了。

Can
you
stand
the
pain?
你能忍得住痛吗？

I
can’t
stand
waiting
any
longer.
我再也等不了了。
2.
What
do
you
mean
by
sth.
?某物是什么意思呢?
=
What’s
the
meaning
of
sth
?
=
What
does
sth.
mean?
3.
I
hope
I
can
move
from
here
soon.
我希望我能早点从这儿搬走。
当主从句主语一致时，常可转换成不定式短语
=
I
hope
to
move
from
here
soon.

我希望早点从这儿搬走。
4．There
are
several
chemical
factories
pouring
waste
water
into
the
river.
有几座工厂正往河里排放污水。

There
be
+
sb.
/
sth.
+
doing
sth.

表有某人/
某物正在做某事。

如：
There
are
some
birds
singing
in
the
tree.
树上有些鸟儿在歌唱。There
is
a
little
girl
crying
in
the
street.
街上有个小女孩在哭。
5．stop
doing
sth.
停止做（正在进行的）事
stop
to
do
sth.
停下来去做（另一件）事
如：It’s
late.
They
will
stop
working
and
(stop)
to
have
supper.
很迟了。他们将停下来吃晚饭。
The
students
stopped
talking
and
to
listen
to
the
teacher.
学生们停止说话去听课。
6．I’m
sorry
for
making
so
much
noise.
很抱歉我弄出这么大的噪音。
be
sorry
for
doing
sth.

表对做过的事感到抱歉
be
sorry
to
do
sth.

表对当前的事感到抱歉
如：I’m
sorry
for
waking
you
up
yesterday.
很抱歉昨天把你弄醒了。
I’m
sorry
to
trouble
you.
很抱歉打扰你了。
I’m
sorry
to
hear
that.
听到那个（消息）感到很遗憾。
7．
…,not
all
people
know
that
noise
is
also
a
kind
of
pollution.
并不是所有的人都知道噪音也是一种污染。
not
与both、all
、every
以及
every
的派生词连用时，表部分否定。如：Not
everybody
knows
this
secret.
不是人人知道这个秘密。Nobody
knows
this
secret.
没有一个人知道这个秘密。
I
don’t
know
all
(of)
your
names.
你们的名字我并不都知道。
I
know
none
of
your
names.
我不知道你们所有人的名字。
8.
Recently
it
was
reported
that
many
teenagers
in
America
can
hear
no
better
than
65-year-old
people
do,…

近来据报道，美国许多青少年的听力和65岁的老人一样差。no
better
than…
表“同……(几乎)一样差;
不比……做得好”
如:
Lucy
did
no
better
than
Lily
in
the
exam.
露西和莉莉考得几乎一样糟.

=
Lucy
almost
did
as
badly
as
Lily
in
the
exam.
四、重点语法
现在完成时中延续性的动作或状态和由for
/
since
引导的一段时间状语搭配使用。
a)“for
+
时间段”
与
“since
+
时间点”
都表“一段时间”，常用How
long
提问。
如:
----How
long
have
you
been
like
this?----I
have
been
like
this
since
last
month./
for
a
month.

----How
long
have
you
lived
in
Changle?
----I
have
lived
in
Changle
for
ten
years
/
since
ten
years
ago.
b)
如句中含有非延续性动词，则改为相应的延续性动词或状态。如：I
bought
this
TV
three
days
ago.=
I
have
had
this
TV
for
three
days.
His
cat
died
yesterday.=
His
cat
has
been
dead
since
yesterday.
※
常见的非延续性动词转换成延续性动词如下：
come—be
here;
go—be
there;
close—be
closed;
open—be
open;
buy—have;
borrow
—keep;
leave—be
away;
begin—be
on;
finish—be
over;
die—be
dead
etc.
Topic
2
How
does
pollution
hurt
the
earth?
一、重点词汇
（一）词形变换
1.
none
(反义词)
all
2.
both
(反义词)
neither

3.
rubbish
(同义词)
litter4．
teal
(过去式)
stole
(过去分词)
stolen
5.
spit
(过去式；过去分词)
spat6.
behave
(名词)
behavior
7.
prevent
(同义词)
stop

8.
although
(同义词)
though
9.
pollute
(句词)
pollution10.
completely
(形容词)
complete
（二）重点词组
1．read
this
article
看这篇文章
2．here
and
there
=
everywhere

到处
3．care
for
=
look
after
=
take
care
of
照顾
4．give
some
advice
to
…

提出一些建议给……
5．set
one’s
mind
to
sth.
集中精力于……;
用心于……
6．protect
nature

保护自然
7．wash
away
冲走
8．blow
away
吹走；刮走
9．turn
into
=
change
into转变成
10．die
out灭绝；绝迹
11．stop
/
prevent
…(from)
doing
sth.
阻止……做某事
12．keep…from
doing
sth.

阻止……做某事
13．move
toward…
朝……移动
14．cut
down
砍倒
15．run
away
跑走;
流走
16．cut
off中断
17．on
the
earth在地球上
18．
be
in
danger
of
(doing)
sth.

处于做某事的危险中
19．destroy/
harm/
pollute
the
environment
破坏/损害/污染环境
20．have
a
quiet
life过着平静的生活
21．plenty
of
大量的
22．come
to
realize
开始意识
23．have
a
clean-up
大扫除
24．one
after
another一个接着另一个
25．on
recycled
paper

在再生纸上
26．enter
the
competition
进入比赛
27．offer
one’s
suggestion提供某人的建议
二、重点句型
1．
But
the
government
has
done
something
useful
to
protect
the
environment.
但政府为了保护环境已做了一些有益的事。
2．
We
shouldn’t
leave
rubbish
here
and
there/
everywhere.

我们不应该到丢弃垃圾。
3．
Don’t
step
on
the
grass
or
pick
the
flowers
around
us.
不要践踏我们周围的草坪和采摘花朵。
4．
Everyone
should
care
for
/look
after/
take
care
of
wild
animals
and
plant
more
trees.
每一个人都应当保护野生动物并且多种树。
5．
We
should
do
everything
we
can
to
protect
the
environment.

我们应尽一切努力保护环境。
6．
Nothing
is
difficult
if
you
set
your
mind
to
it.
世上无难事，只怕有心人。
7．
The
wind
is
blowing
strongly
with
lots
of
sand.
风夹着沙子猛烈地刮着。
8．
They
are
dying
out
because
of
all
kinds
of
pollution.

由于各种污染，他们正濒临灭绝。
9.
It
caused
Harbin
City
to
cut
off
its
water
supply
for
five
days.
它导致哈尔滨市断水5
天。
10.
Some
things
we’ve
done
are
very
good,
while
some
are
not
good
for
the
earth.
我们所做的一些事情对地球有益，然而有一些却对地球有着负面影响。
11.
As
a
result,
many
rivers
and
lakes
are
dead
now.

结果，现在许多河流湖泊失去生机。
三、
重点语言点
1.
It
says
that
China
has
become
the
world’s
largest
producer
and
user
of
coal.
它（文章）写到中国已经成为世界上最大的煤炭生产和消费国。
sth.
+
says
that…
此句型中主语是事或物，say表用“文字、数字”说明信息。如：
It
says
“
Happy
New
Year!”
on
the
card.
卡片上写着“新年快乐！”。
The
clock
says
that
it
is
20:00
now.
这面钟显示现在是20：00。

2.
As
we
know,
none
of
us
likes
pollution.
众所周知，没有人喜欢污染。
none与no
one
的区别：
a)
none
“全无”，既可指人也可指物，后常跟of
的短语;
作主语时，谓语动词既可用单数也可用复数；no
one只指人，后不能跟of
的短语;
作主语时，谓语动词只用作单数。如：

He
has
read
none
of
these
books.（指物）这些书他一本都没看过。

None
of
my
friends
like/
likes
drawing.（指人）我的朋友们没有一个喜欢画画。

No
one
is
here.
没有一个在这儿。
b)
none回答how
many/
much的问题；no
one回答who的问题。
如：

A:
How
many
students
come
to
school
by
taxi?
B:
None.有多少的学生搭出租车来上学？
没有人。

A:
How
much
water
is
there
in
the
bottle?
B:
None.瓶子里有多少水？
一点儿也没有。

A:
Who
is
in
the
room?
B:
No
one.谁在房中？没有人。
3．
It
has
become
a
big
problem
recently.最近它已经成为一个严重问题。recently“到目前为止；近来”，常用于现在完成时。如：
I
haven’t
heard
from
him
recently.
最近，我没收到他的来信。
She
has
read
some
books
on
history
recently.
最近她看了一些有关历史的书。

4．
When
it
rains,
the
soil
will
be
washed
away.下雨时，土壤就会被冲走。
will
be
+过去分词为一般将来时的被动语形式。如：
The
earth
will
be
blown
away
by
the
wind.
泥土将会被风刮走。（被动语态）
=
The
wind
will
blow
away
the
earth.
风将会把泥土刮走。（主动语态）
5．A
lot
of
rich
land
has
changed
into
desert,
leaving
only
sand.

许多肥沃的土地已经变成了沙漠，留下的是遍地黄沙。
a)
change…
into…
=
turn…
into…
把…..(转)变成…..
如：
Please
change/
turn
English
into
Chinese.
请把英语变成汉语。
When
the
traffic
lights
change/
turn
into
green,
we
can
go.
当交通灯变成绿色时,我们就可以通行。
b)
leaving
only
stand现在分词短语作状语,
表伴随。如：
The
children
went
away,
talking
and
laughing.
孩子们说着、笑着离开了。
The
girl
is
looking
for
her
mother,
crying
loudly.
这个女孩大声地哭着在寻找她的母亲。

6．Trees
can
stop
the
wind
from
blowing
the
earth
away.
They
can
also
prevent
the
sand
from
moving
toward
the
rich
land.
树可以防风固土，也可阻止风沙吹进良田。
Trees
can
keep
water
from
running
away.
树可以防止水土流失。
stop
/
prevent
sb.
/sth.
(from
)
doing
sth.
阻止/
防止
某人或某物做某事
keep
sb./sth.
from
doing
sth.

阻止/
防止
某人或某物做某事
7.
Although
we
have
built
the
Great
Green
Wall,
we
still
need
to
work
hard
to
protect
the
environment.
尽管我们已经建了绿色长城，我们仍需要致力于保护环境。
although
连词，表“虽然；
尽管”，引导让步状语从句，相当于though
但比though正式。不能与but同时连用。如：
Although
the
question
is
difficult,
he
can
still
answer
it.
尽管这个问题很难，他仍能回答上它。
9．
And
some
animals
are
in
danger
of
disappearing
completely.

=
And
some
animals
are
in
danger
of
dying
out.一些动物濒临灭绝。

in
danger
of
(
doing
)
sth.

处于做某事的危险中；
如：
They
are
in
danger
of
losing
their
lives.
他们正处于失去生命的危险中。
9.
You
may
either
take
a
bus
or
a
taxi.
你们可能搭公车去或者是搭出租车去。
a)
either…or…
“要么……要么……;
或者……或者……”
并列连词,连接对等结构;连接主语时,根据就近原则。如：You
may
come
either
today
or
tomorrow.
你要么今天来，要么明天来。We
can
either
sing
or
dance.
我们可以唱歌或者跳舞。Either
you
or
he
is
right.
要么你对，要么他对。
b)
either
单独使用时，是代词，表“二者之一”既可指人也可指物；用作主语时，谓语动词用作单数。如：
A：Ｗould
you
like
coffee
or
tea?
B:
Either
is
OK
你想要咖啡还是茶？随便都可以。

Either
of
us
is
right.
我们俩中有一人是对的。
四、重点语法不定代词和不定副词：
(一)
不定代词：

指人：someone/
somebody
anyone/
anybody
no
one/
nobody
everyone/everybody

指物：something
anything
nothingeverything
（二）不定副词
指地点：somewhere
anywhere
nowhere

everywhere
（三）用法：
1．
some-复合代词/副词常用于肯定句；如：
I
saw
someone
in
the
room.
我看见房间里有人。
There
is
something
in
the
woods.
树林里有什么东西。
He
has
gone
somewhere
warm
for
his
holiday.
他去暖和的地方度假了。
2．
any-复合代词/副词常用于否定句或疑问句；如：
I
didn’t
see
anyone
in
the
room.
我没看见有人在房间里。
There
isn’t
anything
in
the
woods.
树林里没有什么东西。
He
hasn’t
gone
somewhere
warm
for
his
holiday.他没去暖和的地方度假。
3．
no-
复合代词/副词表全否定；如：
I
saw
nobody
in
the
room.
我看见房间里没有人。
There
is
nothing
in
the
woods.
树林里没有什么东西。
4．
every-
复合代词/副词代替全部；如：
Everyone
is
here.
大家都在这儿。
It
seems
he
knows
everything.
似乎他知道一切。
※
some-复合代词/副词用于疑问句中时，表希望得到对方的肯定回答或表请求；如：
Would
you
like
something
to
drink?
你要点喝的东西吗？
※
any-复合代词/副词用于肯定句时，表“任何”；如：
If
people
spit
anywhere
in
public,
they
should
be
punished.

如果人们在公众的任何地方吐痰，他们应该受罚。※
不定代词作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式；如：
No
one
knows
this
secret.
没有一人知道这个秘密。
Everything
goes
well.
一切进展顺利。
※
如果有定语修饰,定语应放在不定代词或不定副词后；如：
I
have
something
important
to
tell
you.
我有重要的事告诉你。
There
is
nobody
strange
here.
这儿没有一个陌生人。
※
no=
not
any
→
nobody
=
not
anybody;
nothing
=
not
anything
She
didn’t
say
anything.
=
She
said
nothing.
她什么也没说。
There
is
nobody
strange
here.=
There
isn’t
anybody
strange
here.
这儿没有一个陌生人。
Topic
3
Let’s
be
greener
people.
一、重点词汇
（一）词形变换
1.
organization(动词)
organize

2.recycle(动名词)
recycling

3.
follow(形容词)
following
4.electricity(形容词)
electric
5.
move(名词)
movement

6.
quick(副词)
quickly
7.
environment(形容词)
environmental8.
protect(名词)
protection
（二）重点词组
1.
environmental
protection环境的保护
2.
work
for…

为……工作
3.
spread
message
about…
宣传有关……
4.
reduce
the
waste/
air
pollution减少浪费/
空气污染
5.
both
sides
of
………的两面
6.
rather
than

(是)……而不是….
7.
not
only…but
also…不仅…….而且……
8.
save
money/
energy/
electricity省钱/
能源/
电
9.
be
supposed
to
do
sth.

应当做某事
10.
travel
a
short
distance

短途旅行
11.
put…into…

把……放入……
12.
take
up
a
lot
of
space占据许多空间
13.
produce
power
from…

从……获得能量
14.
run
the
car
发动汽车
15.
push…forward
/up
/down
推…….向前/向上/向下
16.
power
machines
发动机器
17.
produce
electricity
by
doing
sth.通过做某事发电
18.
the
movement
of
water

水的流动
19.
be
used
for
doing
sth
被用作做某事20.
take
a
quick
shower
快速淋浴
21.
make
a
short
journey
短途旅行
22.
pick
the
litter
up
捡起垃圾
23.
try
harder
再努力
24.
produce
a
short
oral
report
作一个简短的口头报告
二、重点句型
1．Let’s
be
greener
people.
让我们做环保使者吧。
2．…my
main
job
is
to
help
spread
message
about
protecting
the
environment.
我主要的工作是帮助做有关保护环境的宣传。
3．It’s
kind
of
you
to
do
that.
你那样做真是太好了。
4．Would
you
like
to
be
a
greener
person?
你想成为一名绿色使者吗？
5．Easier
said
than
done.
说得容易，做得难。
6．Actions
speak
louder
than
words.
百说不如一干；事实胜于雄辩。
7．Of
all
the
rubbish,
about
35
percent
can
be
recycled
while
the
rest
can’t.
在所有的垃圾里，大约35%能被回收，但剩余的则不能。
8.
They
work
well,
but
they
are
slow
and
can’t
run
for
long.
他们行驶得很好，但他们行驶很慢并且不能远距离行驶。
三、重点语言点
1.
We
all
know
that
you’re
working
for
some
organizations
that
protect
the
environment.
我们都知道你在为环保组织工作。
work
for…表“为……工作”
He
works
for
a
foreign
company
in
Shanghai.
他在上海为一家外资公司工作。
2.
We
should
use
both
sides
of
paper,
and
reuse
plastic
bags
rather
than
throw
them
away.
我们应该把纸的两面都使用，将塑料袋再次使用而不是轻易扔掉。
a)
both
修饰复数名词；而
either
修饰单数名词；
如：
There
are
a
lot
of
trees
on
both
sides
of
the
road.
=
There
are
a
lot
of
trees
on
either
side
of
the
road.
在路的两边有许多树。
b)
rather
than
表“（是）……而不是”;连词,
连接对等结构,
相当于instead
of如:
I
like
coffee
rather
than
tea.
=
I
like
coffee
instead
of
tea.我喜欢咖啡而不是茶.
He
likes
listening
to
music
rather
than/
instead
of
singing.
他喜欢听音乐而不是唱歌.
He
wants
to
go
today
rather
than/
instead
of
tomorrow.
他想今天走而不明天.
I
did
my
homework
rather
than
watched
TV.
=
I
did
my
homework
instead
of
watching
TV.
昨晚我做作业了而不是看电视.

但rather
than位于句首时,
后跟动词原形,它不受句中谓语动词的时态影响。如：
Rather
than
do
it
by
myself,
I
didn’t
ask
for
help.
宁可自己干,
我没请人帮忙。
3.
Everyone
is
supposed
to
do
it.
每个人都应该那样做。
be
supposed
to
do
sth.指（按规定、习惯、安排等）应当做某事；必须做某事；相当于should;
用于否定句时，表“允许”；
如：
Teachers
are
supposed
to/
should
know
a
lot.
老师应该知道很多。
You
are
not
supposed
to
smoke
here.
这里不允许抽烟。
4.
First,
you
ought
to
turn
off
the
lights
when
you
leave
a
room.

首先，当你离开房间的时候，应该随手关灯。
ought
to
情态动词,
表
“应该;
应当”;
语气比
should
强;指道义上应该做的事,有时含有责备或督促的语气。should
指主观上感到有责任或义务去做。如：
You
ought
to
help
your
mother
do
some
housework.你应该帮你妈妈做些家务。
We
should
study
hard.我们应该努力学习。
其否定式和疑问式：
You
oughtn’t
to
get
up
so
late
in
the
morning.你早晨不应该起这么晚。
Ought
I
to
tell
her
the
bad
news?
我该告诉她坏消息吗？
Yes,
you
ought.
No,
you
oughtn’t.
四、重点语法

并列句：是由并列连词把两个或两个以上的简单句连在一起构成的句子，连词前可用逗号，也可不用逗号。
1．表示并列关系，常用连接词有and,
not
only…but
also…等。如：
His
father
is
a
teacher
and
his
mother
is
a
doctor.
他的父亲是一位老师，母亲是一位医生。
Mr.
Green
can
not
only
drive
a
car
but
also
repair
it.
格林先生不但会开车而且还能修车。
2．表示转折，常用连词有but,
while等。如：
I
bought
my
sister
a
present,
but
she
didn’t
like
it.
我给妹妹买了一件礼物，但是她并不喜欢。
Tom
does
housework
every
day
while
his
sister
does
nothing.
汤姆每天都做家务活，而他的妹妹什么也不做。
3．表示选择关系，常用连词有or,
either…or…等。如：
He
speaks
French,
or
perhaps
he
understands
it.
他会讲法语，或者懂法语。
Either
he
could
not
come
or
he
did
not
want
to.
他要么是不能来要么是不想来。
4.
表示因果关系，常用连词有so,
for等。如：
Her
mother
is
ill,
so
she
has
to
stay
at
home
and
look
after
her
mother.
她母亲病了，所以她不得不呆在家里照看她。
The
ground
is
very
wet,
for
it
rained
last
night.地面很湿，因为昨晚下雨了。
Unit
3
English
around
the
world
Topic1
English
is
widely
spoken
around
the
world.
一.重点词语
1.be
able
to=can
能够,会
2.can’t
wait
to
do
sth.迫不急待地做某事
3.have
a
(good)
chance
to
do
sth.有(好)机会做某事
4.practice
doing
sth.练习做某事
5.be
made
by…被……制做;
be
made
of/from…由……制成;be
made
in…在某地制造
6.on
business出差
7.be
similar
to…和……相似
8.translate…into…把……翻译成……
9.have
no/some
trouble
(in)
doing
sth.做某事没有/有些困难
10.once
in
a
while=sometimes/at
times偶尔,间或
11.whenever=no
matter
when无论何时
12.as
well
as以及
13.mother
tongue
母语
14.take
the
leading
position处于领先地位
15.encourage
sb.
to
do
sth.鼓励某人做某事
16.call
for号召二.重点句型
1.Disneyland
is
enjoyed
by
millions
of
people
from
all
over
the
world.世界上数以百万的人们都喜欢迪斯尼乐园。
2.I
hope
I
can
go
there
one
day.
希望有一天我能去那儿。
3.English
is
widely
spoken
around
the
world.英语在世界上被广泛使用。
4.It
is
also
spoken
as
a
second
language
in
many
countries.
在许多国家它也被用作第二语言。
5.It
is
possible
that
you
will
have
some
trouble.你可能会遇到一些麻烦。
6.It’s
used
as
the
first
language
by
most
people
in
America,
Canada,
Australia
,Great
Britain
and
New
Zealand.
它被美国、加拿大、澳大利亚、英国和新西兰的大多数人用作第一语言。
7.And
two
thirds
of
the
world’s
scientists
read
English.
并且世界上三分之二的科学家用英语阅读。
三.语法学习
一般现在时的被动语态
英语语态有主动语态和被动语态两种。主语是动作的执行者，叫主动语态。
如：We
clean
the
classroom.我们打扫教室。
主语是动作的承受者，叫被动语态。
如：The
classroom
is
cleaned
(by
us).教室被（我们）打扫。
1．
被动语态的构成：助动词be+及物动词的过去分词+（by+宾语）
其中by意为“被……；由……”，表动作的执行者。
如：The
glass
is
broken
by
that
boy.玻璃杯是那个男孩打破的。
be有人称、数和时态的变化，其肯定式、否定式、疑问式的变化规则与be作为连系动词时完全一样。
如：English
is
widely
spoken
around
the
world.
（肯定式）
English
is
not
widely
spoken
around
the
world.
（否定式）
Is
English
widely
spoken
around
the
world?
（疑问式）

Yes,
it
is./No,
it
isn’t.
2．
被动语态的用法：（1）在没有指明动作的执行者或者不知道动作执行者的情况下，可用被动语态。如：This
coat
is
made
of
cotton.这件大衣是棉制的。（2）要强调动作的承受者而不是执行者时，用被动语态。如：Her
bike
is
stolen.她的自行车被偷了。
3．
主、被动语态的转换：
主动语态：主语+及物动词谓语动词+宾语（+其它）
被动语态：主语+be+及物动词的过去分词+by+宾语（+其它）
注意：（1）主动、被动互转时，时态不变。（2）主动句的主语是代词的主格形式，变成被动态by的宾语时，要用宾格形式。如：
(1)
People
grow
rice
in
the
south.

Rice
is
grown
(by
people)
in
the
south.
(2)
She
takes
care
of
the
baby.

The
baby
is
taken
care
of
(by
her).四.交际用语：谈论英语的广泛使用
1.---You’ll
have
a
good
chance
to
practice
speaking
English
there.
---You’re
right.

2.---But
I’m
not
good
at
English.
I’m
a
little
afraid.
---Don’t
worry.
3.---Is
Spanish
similar
to
English?
---Not
really.
Topic
2
English
is
spoken
differently
in
different
countries.
一.
重点词语
1.by
the
way
顺便说一下
2.depend
on取决于……；依靠……
3.be
different
from与……不同
4.succeed
in成功，达成
5.make
yourself
understood表达你自己的意思
6.on
one’s
way
to
在某人去……的路上
7.see
sb.
Off给……送行
8.leave
for…前往某地/leave…for…离开……去……
9.in
twenty
minutes二十分钟之后
10.written
English笔头英语/oral
English英语口语
11.generally
speaking一般说来，大致上说
12.as
for
sb./sth.至于某人/某物
13.be
close
to…靠近……
14.in
person身体上，外貌上；亲自
15.be
found
of…爱好……
16.be
forced
to
do
sth.被迫做……/force
sb.to
do强迫某人做某事
17.even
worse
更糟的是
二.重点句型
1.
Is
Australia
English
the
same
as
British
English?
澳式英语和英式英语一样吗?
2.English
is
spoken
differently
in
different
English-speaking
countries.
不同的国家使用不同的英语。
3.
For
example,
there
are
differences
between
British
English
and
American
English.例如，在英式英语和美式英语之间有些不同点。
4
I
can’t
believe
that
I’m
flying
to
Disneyland.我简直不敢相信我就要飞往迪斯尼乐园了。
5.I
hope
I
won’t
have
any
difficulty.我希望不会遇到什么困难。
6.Whenever
you
need
help,
send
me
an-mail
or
telephone
me.
无论何时你需要帮忙，给我发电子邮件或打电话。
7.Not
only
children
but
also
adults
enjoy
spending
their
holidays
in
Disneyland.不但青少年而且成年人也喜欢到迪斯尼乐园度假。
三、
语法学习
用现在进行时表示将来
现在进行时表示将来时，常有“意图”、“安排”（但不是固定不变的）或“打算”含义。它表示最近或较近的将来，所用的动词多是位移动词。
如：come,
go,
arrive,
leave,
fly,
start,
begin,
return,
open,
die
例：I’m
going.我要走了。
When
are
you
starting?你什么时候动身？
Don’t
worry.
The
train
is
arriving
here
soon.别着急，火车马上就到了。
表示将来的现在进行时除了用于位移动词外，亦可用于某些非位移动词。
如：My
uncle
is
meeting
us
tomorrow.我叔叔明天会见我们。
She
is
buying
a
new
bike
soon.她不久将买一辆新自行车。
四.交际用语：谈论不同国家英语的不同点并了解交际中的身体语言
1.I
can’t
follow
you.
Can
you
speak
more
slowly,
please?
2.Oh,
it
sounds
interesting.
3.If
you
want
to
succeed
in
making
yourself
understood,
you
need
to
know
some
of
these
differences
4.---What’s
up?
---The
foreigner
is
asking
for
a
ride.
5.Generally
speaking,
American
English
is
different
from
British
English
in
pronunciation
and
spelling.
Topic
3
It’s
important
to
learn
English
well.
一、
重点词语
1.in
public在公共场所
2.at
times=sometimes有时
3.feel
like
doing=would
like
to
do想要做……
4..give
up
sth./doing
sth.放弃
5..turn
to
sb.
for
help求助于某人
6..give
sb.
some
advice
on/about…给某人一些有关……的建议
7..be
weak
in在……方面很差/be
good
at在……方面很好
8..be
afraid
of
doing
sth.害怕做某事
9.make
mistakes犯错误
10.take
a
deep
breath深呼吸
11.the
best
time
to
do做某事最好的时间
12.do
some
listening
practice做些听力训练
13.reply
to=answer回答
14.advise
sb.
to
do建议某人做某事（名词advice）
二、
重点句型
1.Could
you
make
yourself
understood
in
the
U.S.A?
在美国，别人能懂得你的话吗？
2.I
don’t
know
what
to
do.我不知道该怎么办？
3.At
times
I
feel
like
giving
up.有时我想要放弃。
4.Try
to
guess
the
meanings
of
the
new
words,
and
get
the
main
idea
of
the
article.尽量猜测生词的意思，理解文章的大意。
5.I
dare
not
answer
questions
in
class,
because
I’m
afraid
of
making
mistakes.我不敢在课堂上回答问题，困为我害怕犯错误。
6.It’s
an
honor
to
talk
with
all
of
you.与在座的各位交谈是我的荣幸。
7.But
remember
to
choose
the
ones
that
fit
you
best.
但是记住要选择最适合你的一种。
8.I
insist
that
you
practice
English
every
day.
我坚持认为你们每天都应该练习英语。
9.Believing
in
yourself
is
the
first
step
on
the
road
to
success.

自信是通往成功的第一步。
三、
语法学习
wh-
+to
do
wh-是指when,
where,
which,
who(m)及how等连接词，它们和动词不定式连用，即为wh-
+to
do结构。这种结构在句中常作主语、表语和宾语，作宾语时可以转换为宾语从句。(对于谓语动词来说，wh-
+to
do这个不定式动词的动作是个尚未发生的动作，所以在转换成宾语从句时，通常须加情态动词或用将来时表示未来。)
如：I
don’t
know
what
to
do.=I
don’t
know
what
I
should
do.

She
can’t
decide
which
to
buy.=she
can’t
decide
which
she
will
buy.
反之，如果主句中的主语与宾语从句中的主语一致时，宾语从句（由疑问词引导）通常可以与“疑问词+不定式”互相转换。
如：I
don’t
know
what
I
should
do.=I
don’t
know
what
to
do.
如果不一致就不能转换。I
want
to
know
what
Mary
will
do.(不能说:I
want
to
know
what
to
do.)四、交际用语：谈论如何学习英语
1.---…,
but
I
hate
to
speak
English
in
public.
---You’d
better
not.
2.---I
know
it’s
very
important
to
learn
English
well.
But
it’s
difficult
for
me.
---Me,
too.
3.Have
you
ever
had
any
difficulties
in
studying
English?
4.---…,
could
you
give
us
some
advice
on
how
to
learn
English
well?
---You’d
better
follow
the
tape
and
do
some
listening
practice.
I
think
the
best
time
to
remember
new
words
is
in
the
morning.

Unit
4
Fantastic
Science

Topic
1
The
spaceship
is
so
magical!
一、
重点词汇：
（一）词形转换：

1.
successful（副词）2.
proper（副词）
3.
completely（动词）4.
leader（动词）
5.
succeed（名词）

6.
hero（复数）
7.
physics（形容词）
8.
fix（同义词）
9.
introduce（名词）
10.
far（比较级）
（二）重点词组：
1.
go
around

环绕
2.
send…into…
=send
up…into…
把……送入

3.
congratulations
on
sth
祝贺某事
4.
be
proud
of
为……而自豪
5.
be
moved
by
为……而感动
6.
Thanks/Thank
you
for
+n./ving
sth感谢某人做的某事
7.
have
physical
examinations
做体检
8.
in
good/bad
health
处于好（不好）的身体状态
9.
can’t
help
doing

情不自禁做……
10.
take
turn
to
(do
sth)

轮流（做某事）
11.
no
doubt无疑地
12.
as
well
as除……的之外，也
13.
for
instance/example

例如
14.
work
on
做……（方面）的工作
15.
depend
on/upon

依靠，依赖
16.
turn
on
打开
17.
turn
off
关掉
18.
turn
up
开大
19.
turn
down关小
20.
click
on
用鼠标点击
21.
look
forward
to
doing
sth期待做某事

二、重点句型：
1.
Now
big
plans
are
being
made
to
send
up
more
satellites
and
even
build
a
space
station.
现在中国正在计划发射更多的卫星，甚至建造一个空间站。
(1)
句子“are
being
made”是现在进行时的被动语态，结构“be
being+过去分词”。
(2)
主动句中的宾补如果是不带to的不定式时，变成被动句后，成为主补的不定式必须带to,常见跟不带to的复合宾语的动词有see、feel、hear、make等。
2.
I’m
moved
by
what
Yang
Liwei
did.
我被杨利伟所做的事感动了。
(1)
What
Yang
Liwei
did是介词by的宾语从句，意为“杨利伟所做的事”
(2)
be
moved
by为……而感动
如：
The
students
are
moved
by
the
old
man’s
story.
同学们为那位老人的故事而感动。
3.
Generally
speaking,
we
are
in
good
health
now.
一般来说，我们现在的健康状况良好。
(1)
generally
speaking

“一般来说、大体上、大概”
(2)
in
good/bad
health处于好（不好）的身体状况。如:
He
has
a
cold,
he
is
always
in
bad
health.
他感冒了，他的身体状况总是不好。
4.
We
couldn’t
help
looking
at
the
earth
again
and
again.
我们忍不住再三地看着地球。
(1)
can’t/couldn’t
help
doing
sth.
忍不住做某事，不能停止做某事。如：I
can’t
help
crying.
我忍不住哭了。
(2)
again
and
again

一再，屡次，如：

The
teacher
has
told
him
again
and
again.老师已屡次和他讲过了。
5.
I
was
able
to
fall
asleep
as
soon
as
I
got
into
the
sleeping
bag.
We
took
turns
to
have
a
rest.
一进入睡袋我就睡着了。我们轮流休息。
take
turns
to
(do
sth.)

轮流（做某事）。
The
Browns
take
turns
to
look
after
the
baby.
布朗一家轮流照看这个婴儿。
6.
It
has
proved
that
China
has
made
great
progress
in
developing
its
space
industry.
这证明了中国航天业的发展已取得了巨大的进步。
It
has
proved
that…
这证明了……
7.There
is
no
doubt
that
computers
are
widely
used
by
workers
in
business
and
technology.
毫无疑问,电脑被商业,科技工作者广泛地应用.
There
is
no
doubt
that…
译为
“毫无疑问”
如:
There
is
no
doubt
that
we
should
protect
the
environment.毫无疑问我们应该保护环境。
8.
Computers
have
made
the
world
smaller,
like
a
“village”.
电脑使得世界变小了，就像一个“村庄”。
make+宾语+形容词
“使……怎样”
如：
We’ll
try
our
best
to
make
our
country
more
and
more
beautiful.
我们将尽全力使我产的国家越来越美丽.
三、日常交际用语：
Congratulations!
Thanks
for
your
introduction.
Pleased
to
meet
you.
=Nice
to
meet
you.
It’s
an
honor
to
interview
you
now.
What
do
you
think
of
ShenZhou
VI?
=What
are
your
thoughts
about
ShenZhou
VI?
四、重点语法：
宾语补足语:
宾语补足语用来补充说明宾语，与宾语一起构成复合宾语。可作宾语补足语的有名词、形容词、副词、介词和动词不定式等。
（一）、名词、形容词、副词、介词短语作宾语补足语。如：
1.We
call
him
Jim.（名词）我们叫他吉姆。
2.We
must
keep
our
school
clean
every
day.（形容词）
我们必须每天保持校园清洁。
3.Call
him
in,
please.（副词）
请叫他进来。
4.Leave
it
on
the
desk.（介词短语）
把它留在课桌上。
（二）、动词不定式作宾语补足语可分为三种情况：
1.跟带to的不定式作宾语补足语。常见的这类动词有：ask,
tell,
get,
teach,
want,
invite,
like,
allow,
wish,
encourage等。如：Tell
Jane
to
sing
us
a
song.叫简给我们唱支歌。
2.跟不带to的不定式作宾语补足语。常见的这类动词有“一感（feel）、二听（listen
to,
hear）,三让（make,
let,
have）,四看（look
at,
see,
watch,
notice）如：Let’s
have
a
rest.让我们休息一会儿。
但这种结构变成被动语态时，to必须加上。如：
He
was
seen
to
leave
the
room
with
a
book
in
his
hand.有人见他手拿着一本书离开这个房间。
3.跟带to或不带to的动词不定式作宾语补足语。
这类动词只有help。如：
Can
you
help
me
(to)
wash
my
clothes
?
你能帮我洗衣服吗？
（三）、分词作宾语补足语可分为两种情况。
1.现在分词作宾语补足语，经常表示正在发生的动作。可跟这类补足语的动词有：see,
watch,
hear等。如：
I
hear
somebody
singing
in
the
next
room.
我听见有人在隔壁唱歌。
2.过去介词作宾语补足语，经常表示被动。如：
You
need
to
have
your
hair
cut.
你需要理发了。Topic
2
When
was
it
invented?

重点词汇：
1.
be
used
for
+ving
被用做……
2.
come
true
实现
3.
It’s
said
that
据说
4.
during/in
one’s
life某人一生
5.
be
known
as以……（身份）而著名
6.
know/say
for
certain

确切知道/肯定地说
7.
all
the
time

一直、总是
8.
no
longer=not…any
longer
不再
(no
more,
not…any
more)
9.
as
long
as
只要
10.
as
far
as
就……，尽……
11.
make
a
great
contribution
对……作出巨大贡献
12.
the
rest
of
the
time

在其余地时间里
13.
at
any
time在任何时候
一、
重点句型：
1.
Because
I’m
not
allowed
to
play
computer
games.
因为我不可以玩电脑游戏。
allow
“允许、准许”的意思。常用于以下几种形式：
(1)
allow
+n./prep

如：

We
can’t
allow
such
a
thing.
我们不容许这种事情发生。
(2)
allow
sb.
to
do
sth
允许某人做某事

如：
She
allowed
me
to
go
fishing.
她允许我去钓鱼。
(3)
allow
+doing
sth允许做某事
如：

We
don’t
allow
smoking
in
the
reading-room.
我们不允许在阅览室吸烟。
(4)
be
allowed
to
do
sth

如：
被允许做某事
The
students
are
allowed
to
play
games
on
the
play
ground
after
school.
放学后学生们被准许在操场上做游戏。
2.
How
do
you
say
this
in
English?
这用英语怎么说？
其意思与What’s
this
in
English相同。
3.
It’s
made
from
wood.
它用木材做的。
(1)
be
made
in在……地方制造，后接表示地点的名词。
(2)
be
made
of用……制造的，表示原材料未经化学变化，仍可看得出原材料。
(3)
be
made
from
用……制造的，表示原材料经过化学变化，已看不出其原样。
(4)
be
made
by由（被）……（人）制作，后接表示人的名词或代词。
(5)
be
made
into
（某物）被制成……
(6)
be
made
up
of
由……组成
如：
The
TV
set
is
made
in
Japan.
这台电视机是日本生产的。
These
houses
are
made
of
stones.
这些房子是由石头建造的。

Paper
is
made
from
wood.
纸是木头造的。
Was
this
cake
made
by
your
mother?
这蛋糕是你妈妈做的吗？
Metal
can
be
made
into
all
kinds
of
things.
金属可以制成各种各样的物品。
The
medical
team
is
made
up
of
ten
doctors.
这支医疗队由10位大夫组成。
4.
It’s
used
for
helping
us
to
improve
our
English.
它用来帮助我们提高英语水平。
(1)
be
used
for+ving
be
used
to
do
（被）用来做……
强调用途或作用
(2)be
used
as

（被）作为……而用，强调被当作工具或手段来用。
(3)be
used
by被……使用，by后跟人/物，强调使用者。如:
Pens
are
used
for
writing.
钢笔被用来写字。
Wood
is
used
to
make
paper.
木材被用来造纸。
English
is
used
as
a
foreign
language
in
China.
英语在中国被当作外语使用。
Recorders
are
often
used
by
English
teachers.
英语老师经常使用录音机。
5.
People
are
surprised
at
the
rapid
development
of
robots.
人们为机器人的飞速发展感到惊讶。
句子中be
surprised
at…是一个系表结构，
表示“对……感到惊讶”。而be
surprised
by…是一个被动语态形式，表示“被……所惊讶”。如：
I
am
surprised
at
you.
我对你的举动感到诧异。
The
manager
was
surprised
by
what
he
saw
on
the
computer.
那位经理被眼前出现在电脑屏幕上的东西所惊讶。
6.
They
will
no
longer
want
to
be
our
servants,
but
our
masters.
它们将不再愿意做我们的人，而要做我们的主人。
no
longer（通常在动词前），not…any
longer;
not…any
more（用于非正式文体中）都可表示“（过去曾……）现在不再……”
如：
She
no
longer
lives
here.
She
doesn’t
live
here
any
longer(或
any
more).
她不在这儿住了。（过去她曾住这儿）
7.
This
method
worked
well
at
night
as
long
as
the
weather
was
good
and
the
stars
could
be
seen.
在夜间只要天气晴朗，能看见星星，这种方法就能很好地发挥作用。
work
well
有效
as
long
as
只要
三、日常交际用语：What’s
it
made
of
from?
When/where
was
it
made?
It
was
invented
in
1879.
What
will
our
future
be
like?
I
hope
your
dream
will
come
true.
四、重点语法：
1、
一般过去时的被动语态
谓语部分的基本形式是be的过去式was/were+及物动词的过去分词。如：When
was
it
made?
它是什么时候制造的？
It
was
made
in
1980.它是1980年制造的。
When
was
the
digital
camera
invented?
数码像机是什么时候发明的？
It
was
invented
in
1975.
它是1975年发明的。
2、时间前所用介词的速记歌
年月周前要用in，日子前面却不行。
遇到几号要用on，上午下午又是in。
要说某日上下午，用on换in才能行。
午夜黄昏须用at，黎明用它也不错。
at也用在时分前，说“差”可要用上to。
说“过”只可使用past，多说多练牢牢记，莫让岁月成蹉跎。
Topic
3Perhaps
people
will
fly
to
Mars.
一、重点词汇：
1.travel
by
spaceship
乘宇宙飞船旅行
2.in
the
future

将来
3.in
order
to
为了
4.on
the
radio通过收音机
5.take
part
in参加
6.grow
up
成长、长大
7.prefer…to
喜欢……胜过……
8.What’s
worse
更为糟糕的是
9.be
worth
it
有好处，值得一干
10.at
a
distance
of

相隔

11.send
sb
a
message
给某人发送信息
二、重点句型：
1.
I
don’t
think
aliens
can
be
found
in
space.
我认为外星人不可能出现在太空里。
(1)当think,
believe,
suppose,
imagine,
expect等动词后的宾语从句含有not的否定词时，该否定应移至主句，即否定主句的谓语动词。如：
I
don’t
think
it
will
rain
tomorrow.
我认为明天不会下雨。
如果主句的主语是第二、三人称，否定式一般不转移。如：
He
supposes
they
won’t
win
the
game.
他猜想他们赢不了比赛。
(2)can
+be
+过去分词，是情态动词构成的被动语态。如：
This
can’t
be
done
in
a
short
time.
这不是短期内能完成的。
2.
It
has
been
two
days
since
we
landed
on
Mars.
自从我们登上火星以来已经两天了。
it用作主语谈论时间，常与since连用。
如：It
is(或has
been)
three
years
since
we
left
school.
自从我们离开学校以来已经三年了。
3.
What’s
worse,
our
water
supplies
were
very
low.
更糟糕的是，我们的水供给是非常有限的。
What’s
worse
更糟糕的是。类似结构还有：What’s
more
更有甚者；更为重要的是。
4.
It’s
a
quarter
as
big
as
the
earth.
它是地球的四分之一大。
倍数表示法：倍数+as+形容词/副词+as
如：This
box
is
three
times
as
heavy
as
that
one.
这只箱子是那只箱子的三倍重。
5.
Mars
goes
around
the
sun
at
a
distance
of
about
228
million
kilometers.
恒星在相隔大约228000000千米的地方绕着太阳转动。
(1)at
a
distance
of

相隔
(2)at
a
distance
在远处。如：

The
moon
goes
around
the
earth
at
a
distance
of
380000km.

月球在距地球38万千米的地方绕地球旋转。

The
police
followed
him
at
a
distance.
警察远远地跟着他。
二、
日常交际用语:
Sound
great!
What
is
it
about?
What
fun!
I
can’t
wait.
You
think
man
can
live
in
space
one
day?
I
Think
so.
I
hope
I
can
live
there
one
day.

四、重点语法：
1、情态动词的被动语态:是由“情态动词+be+及物动词的过去分词”构成。如：Aliens
can
not
be
seen
on
the
earth.
在地球上不可能见到外星人。
Other
planets
may
be
visited
soon
in
the
future.
将来其他的星球也会有人登陆。
Scientific
research
should
be
done
carefully.
应该认真地进行科学研究。
These
trees
must
be
watered
in
time.
这些树应该及时浇水。
2、书面表达技巧
善于衔接。一篇好作文不仅是词汇、句子的简单罗列，语句间如缺乏必要的连接过渡和照应，作文就会结构简单，句式单调，缺少灵气，而看似不显眼的衔接过渡可大大增强作文的连贯性，逻辑性和可读性。常见的语篇衔接成分见下表：逻辑关系
语篇衔接成分
时间关系
first(ly),second(ly),then,
finally,
suddenly,
immediately,
after,
until,
the
moment,
while
空间关系
in
front
of,
across,
above,
nearby,
at
the
back
of,
next
to,
on
one
side…on
the
other
side
对称关系
on
one
hand…on
the
other
hand,
for
one
thing…for
another
转折关系
but,
however,
yet,
while,
though,
otherwise,
rather
than,
no
matter
what
,on
the
other
hand
因果关系
because
of,
thanks
to,
because,
since,
as,
for
this/that
reason,
as
a
result,
so,
therefore.
条件关系
as
long
as,
if,
unless,
if
necessary
增补关系
besides,
in
addition,
not
only…but
also,
as
well,
what’s
more,what’s
worse
举例
for
example/instance,
such
as,
like,
namely,
in
other
words
评价
as
far
as
I
know,
there
is
no
doubt
that,
I’m
not
sure
that,
It’s
certain
that,
as
we
know,
It’s
known
to
all
that…,
总结
in
a
word,
next
to,
in
short,
in
general,
in
all,
to
sum
up
Generally
speaking,
therefore
仁爱英语九年级下册知识点
Unit
5
Knowing
about
China
Topic
1
How
much
do
you
know
about
China?
1．习惯用语：
1.
live
with
sb.与某人一起居住
2.
places
of
interest名胜
3.
millions
of成百万上千万，数以百万计
4.
all
over/
around/
throughout
the
world世界各地
5.
such
as例如(后跟名词短语)
6.
the
birthplace
of………发源地
7.
a
number
of一些，许多（饰复数名词，做主语时谓复）
8.
the
number
of……的数量（饰复数名词，做主语时谓单）
9.
fetch
sb.
sth.／fetch
sth.
for
sb.
给某人取某物

10.
go
through穿过
11.
lie
in位于
lie
on
毗邻
（接壤）lie
to
位于……附近
（不接壤）12.
be
worth
doing
sth．值得做某事
13.
hear
of听说
14.
make
one’s
dream
come
true=
realize
one’s
dream实现梦想
15.
lose
oneself
in…沉浸于……16.
above在……的上方；
on
在……（表面）上
17.
over在……的（垂直）正上方，（还表跨越、覆盖）
18.
not
only…but
also…不仅……而且……（领近原则）
19.
the
surrounding
area
of周边地区
20.
be
surrounded
with
/by
flowers被花朵包围
21.
be
surrounded
on
three
sides
by
mountains三面环山
22.
the
home
of……之乡23.
be
known／famous
as
作为……而著称

24.
be
known／famous
for
因为……而著称
25.
connect
A
with
B
将A与B连接/联系起来
26.
regard…as
把……看作
27.
go
on
a
visit
to=
visit
参观……
28.
break
down损坏；分解；抛锚
29.
take
away拿走

30.
be
covered
with被……覆盖
31.
do
outdoor
activities做户外活动

32.
at
the
same
time同时
33.
serve
as
…
用作，充当，担任
2．重点句型：
（1）It’s
two
years
since
Mr.
and
Mrs.
Green
came
to
China.
=
Mr.
and
Mrs.
Green
have
been
in
China
for
two
years,
(1)They"re
the
birthplaces
of
Chinese
culture．她们是中国文化的发源地
(2)…，I
can
fetch
you
Guide
to
China．It’s
a
book
which
introduces
China
in
detail．
(3)Tibet
is
in
the
southwest
of
China，isn"t
it?
(4)…they
are
well
worth
visiting．
(5)That’s
the
most
fantastic
place
that
I
have
ever
heard
of．
(6)The
scenery
is
so
attractive
that
visitors
often
lose
themselves
in
it．
(7)Hong
Kong
is
known
as
the
Oriental
Pearl
and
Shopping
Heaven．
(8)People"s
way
of
life
in
the
north
is
quite
different
from
that
in
the
south．
(9)…，but
people
in
the
south
travel
not
only
by
land
but
also
by
water．

难点：
The
west
Lake
has
become
famous
not
only
because
of
its
special
scenery
but
also
because
of
some
beautiful
poems
that
were
written
by
Bai
Juyi
and
Su
Donpo.
主语：The
West
Lake
谓语动词：has
become
（为系动词）
表语：famous
not
only
…
but
also…
并列连词，连词为虚词，在句子中不担当成份，在句子中连接两个状语:because
of
….
because
of
its
special
scenery
…
because
of
some
beautiful
poems
that
were
written
by
Bai
Juyi
and
Su
Dongpo.
整个作为副词作状语修饰形容词“famous”
that
were
written
by
Bai
Juyi
and
Su
Dongpo
这个部分作为“定语从句”修饰poems
Topic
2
I’m
becoming
more
and
more
interested
in
China’s
history1．习惯用语：
1.
in
the
field/
area
of
在……领域
2.
learn
from
sb．向某人学习
3.
at
the
age
of在……年龄
4.
in
one"s
thirties在某人三十几岁时
5.
be
proud
of以……为傲，为……而骄傲
6.
take
pride
in以……为傲，为……而骄傲
7.
be
the
pride
of是……的骄傲
8.
die
of死于……
9.
search
the
Internet上网搜索
10.
search
+某地+for
sth.
搜查某地找某物
11.
as
soon
as……就……
12.
take
an
active
part
in积极参加
13.
set
up建立，创立
14.
bring
down推翻
15.
pass
away去世；消失
16.
be
full
of充满……
17.
give
a
lecture演讲；讲课
18.
achieve
the
victory
of取得……的胜利
19.
wipe
out彻底消灭，全部摧毁
20.
succeed
in
doing成功做……
2．重点句型：
(1)He
was
a
great
thinker
who
had
many
wise
ideas
and
thoughts
about
nature
and
human
behavior．
(2)He
spent
the
rest
of
his
life
teaching
and
writing．
(3)…the
Chinese
people
are
proud
of．
(4)It"s
hard
to
believe!
(5)When
he
was
in
his
thirties，he
took
an
active
part
in
the
battle
against
the
Qing
dynasty．
(6)Unfortunately，Sun
Yat-sen
broke
down
from
hard
work
and
passed
away
full
of
regrets
on
March
12th.
1925．
(7)…，the
Red
Army
succeeded
in
arriving
in
Gansu
Province
in
1936．
(8)Confucius
Was
a
great
man
whose
sayings
are
still
very
famous．3．重难点辨析：spend，cost，take和pay都可以表示“花费”，但用法却不尽相同。
（1）spend的主语必须是人，
常用于以下结构：(1)
spend
time
／money
on
sth.
在……上花费时间（金钱）。例：I
spent
two
hours
on
this
maths
problem.
这道数学题花了我两个小时。(2)
spend
time
／
money
(in)
doing
sth.
花费时间（金钱）做某事。例：They
spent
two
years
(in)
building
this
bridge.
造这座桥花了他们两年时间。
（2）cost的主语是物或某种活动，
还可以表示“值”，
常见用法如下：(1)sth.
costs
(sb.)
＋金钱,某物花了（某人）多少钱。例：A
new
computer
costs
a
lot
of
money.
买一台新电脑要花一大笔钱。(2)
(doing)
sth.
costs
(sb.)
＋时间,某物（做某事）花了（某人）多少时间。例：Remembering
these
new
words
cost
him
a
lot
of
time.
他花了大量时间才记住了这些单词。
注意：cost的过去式及过去分词都是cost,并且不能用于被动句。
（3）take后面常跟双宾语，
常见用法有以下几种：(1)
It
takes
sb.
＋时间＋to
do
sth.
做某事花了某人多少时间。例：It
took
them
three
years
to
build
this
road.
他们用了三年时间修完了这条路。(2)doing
sth.
takes
sb.
＋时间,做某事花了某人多少时间。例：Repairing
this
car
took
him
the
whole
afternoon.
他花了一下午修车。
（4）pay的基本用法是：(1)
pay
(sb.)
money
for
sth.
付钱（给某人）买……。例：I
have
to
pay
them
20
pounds
for
this
room
each
month.
我每个月要付20英磅的房租。(2)pay
for
sth.
付……的钱。例：I
have
to
pay
for
the
book
lost.
我不得不赔丢失的书款。(3)pay
for
sb.
替某人付钱。例：Don’t
worry!
I"ll
pay
for
you.
别担心，
我会给你付钱的。(4)pay
sb.
付钱给某人。
例:
They
pay
us
every
month.他们每月给我们报酬。（5）pay
money
back
还钱。例：May
I
borrow
12
yuan
from
you?
I"ll
pay
it
back
next
week.
你能借给我12块钱吗？下周还你。（6）pay
off
one"s
money还清钱Topic
3
The
dragon
has
become
a
symbol
of
the
Chinese
nation.1．习惯用语：1.
show
(sb.)around/round
someplace带领(某人)参观某地
2.
show
sb.
sth.
=show
sth.
to
sb.
把某物给某人看

3.
in
the
year
of
the
dragon
在龙年
4.
a
symbol
of……的象征

5.
play
an
important
part
in在……中起重要作用
6.
promise
(sb.)
to
do
sth.（向某人）承诺做某事
7.
encourage
sb.
to
do
sth.鼓励某人做某事
8.
either...or...
者……或者...

9.
not
as／so…as…不如……一样……
10.
both…and…两者都……
11.
neither...
nor...
既不……也不……
12.
play
chess下棋
13.
in
memory
of…为了纪念…
14.
depend
on依靠；取决于；信赖
15.
fight
against+事物名词“为反对……而斗争”
16.
fight
against+人或国家“与……战斗”
17.
fight
for+抽象名词
为（事业，自由，真理，权利）而斗争
18.
win+比赛，战斗，奖品

打赢……，获得……
19.
be
similar
to
和……相似
20.
be
the
same
as和……一样
21.
the
writer
and
speaker作家兼演说家
22.
at
the
end
of在……的末端/尽头，by
the
end
of到……为止
2．重点句型：
(1)That"s
correct!
(2)It
also
plays
an
important
part
in
Chinese
festivals．
(3)My
elder
brother
was
born
in
the
year
of
the
dragon…
(4)…，but
I
can"t
play
it
as
well
as
my
father．．
(5)Neither
my
mother
nor
my
father
likes
it，…
(6)People
invented
Chinese
chess
in
memory
of
the
famous
battle．
(7)China
is
the
home
of
tea，which
has
more
than
4，000
years
of
history．
(8)Tea
from
China，along
with
silk
and
porcelain，begin
to
be
known
by
the
world
over
a
thousand
years
ago
and
has
been
an
important
Chinese
export
since
then．
(9)A
friendship
between
gentlemen
is
like
a
cup
of
tea．
3．词组的运用：
both．．．and…，either．．．or．．．，neither．．．nor…，not
only．．．but
also．．．
e.g．(1)Either
Beihai
Park
or
Shichahai
is
a
good
place
to
visit．
(2)Both
my
father
and
I
like
it
very
much．
(3)Neither
my
mother
nor
my
father
likes
it．
Unit
6
Entertainment
and
Friendship
Topic
1
I
would
rather
watch
sports
shows
than
those
ones
三、
重点短语
1、take
part
in
参加
2、in
one’s
spare/
free
time
在某人的业余时间
3、agree
with
sb.同意某人的意见
4、be
ready
to
do
sth.准备好做某事，乐于做某事
5、win
a
prize获得奖品
6、
give
sb.
a
sudden
attack
on
the（部位）
给某人…一个突然袭击
7、be
tired
of…对……感到厌烦
8、from
then
on
从那时起
9、order
sb.
to
do
sth.命令某人做某事
10、fall
in
love
(with
sb.)
与某人相爱
11、in
total总计
12、once
upon
a
time从前=long
long
ago
13、be
angry
at
sth.
对某事感到生气
14、keep
secrets
保守秘密
15、pay
attention
to…注意
16、a
homeless/
running
/lucky
dog丧家犬/走狗/幸运儿
17、stand
for
代表
18、have
a
huge
/bad
influence
on…在…….方面起了巨大/
坏的影响
19、ways
of
doing
sth.
做某事的方式
20、keep…away
from…
使……远离…….
21、a
waste
of
time
浪费时间
22、do
research
做研究
23、support
one’s
view
支持某人的观点
四、
重点句型
1、It’s
nothing.没什么
2、It
is
hard
for
me
to
learn
to
play
Chinese
chess.

对于我来说学下中国象棋是很困难的.
3、I’m
tired
of
watching
those
shows.
我对看那些节目感到厌烦.
4、Which
program
do
you
prefer,
TV
plays
or
sports
shows?

你更喜欢看哪一种节目,电视剧还是运动节目?
5、----I
would
rather
watch
sports
shows.
我更喜欢看运动节目.
----So
would
I.
我也是.
6、The
mother
of
the
land
was
quite
angry
at
what
he
said.
大地的母亲对他所说的相当的生气.
7、Whenever
scorpions
appeared,
hunters
would
hide.

无论蝎子什么时候出现,猎人们都会躲藏起来.
8、As
we
know,
there
are
differences
between
western
culture
and
Chinese
culture.
众所周知,
中西方文化存在着不同.
三、重点知识点
1.
I
would
rather
watch
TV
shows
than
sports
shows.
我宁愿看电视剧而不愿看运动节目.
would
rather…than…表
“宁愿……而不愿”,
与prefer…to…同义,但它们在结构上不同.
前者是
would
rather
do
sth.
than
do
sth.,=
would
do
sth.
rather
than
do
sth.…;后者是
prefer
doing
sth.
to
doing
sth.
=prefer
to
do
sth.
rather
than
do
sth.
eg:
I
would
rather
stay
at
home
than
go
out.
=
I
prefer
staying
at
home
to
going
out.=
I
would
stay
at
home
rather
than
go
out..=I
prefer
to
stay
at
home
rather
go
out.我宁愿呆在家中而不愿出去.
2.
Was
his
wife
still
alive?
他的妻子还活着吗?
alive
表
“活着的”,
常修饰人,而不修饰物.
一般作表语或宾补.
living
同义,
既可修饰人,
也可修饰物.
在句中既可作定语也可作表语.
eg:
The
old
woman
is
still
alive/living.(作表语)
那个老人还活着.
The
king
wanted
to
keep
Gulliver
alive.(作宾补)
国王想让格利佛活着.
There
is
no
living
things
on
Mars.(作定语)
火星上没有生物.
3.
She
ordered
a
scorpion
to
hide
in
the
dark
to
attack
him.
order
sb.
to
do
sth.

命令/要求某人去做某事
order
sth
for
sb./
sth.
为某人/
某物订购某物
eg:
The
doctor
ordered
me
to
stay
in
bed.
医生命令我好好呆在床上休息.
He
often
orders
books
for
his
son.
他经常为他的儿子订书.
She
ordered
a
suit
for
her
dog.
她为她的狗订购了一套衣服.
4.
However,
sometimes
you
do
not
forgive
others.然而,
你有时不会原谅别人.
forgive
sb.
sth.
原谅某人某事
forgive
sb.
for
doing
sth.
请求别人原谅所做的事
eg:
She
could
forgive
him
anything.

她会原谅他的任何事.
Please
forgive
me
for
disturbing
you.

请原谅我打扰你了.
5.
But
in
western
countries,
dogs
are
considered
honest
and
good
friends
of
humans
但是在西方国家,
狗被认为是诚实的,
是人类的好朋友.
honest
用作形容词,
表
“诚实的;
正直的”
.
在句中可作定语,
表语或宾补.
He
is
an
honest
man.
=
The
man
is
honest.
他是一个诚实的人.
固定搭配:

be
honest
with
sb.
对某人坦诚相待
to
be
honest

说实话,
老实说Topic
2
Who
is
your
favorite
character
in
Chinese
literature?一、重点短语
1、work
hard
at…在……方面努力工作
2、works
of
art艺术作品
3、according
to根据
4、the
introduction
to
the
painting
画的介绍
5、express
strong
feelings
表达强烈的情感
6、in
the
distance
在远处
7、make
up
one’s
mind
to
do
sht.下定决心做某
8、express
the
real
meaning
of
friendship
说明了友谊的真正含义
9、walk
through
the
desert穿过沙漠
10、have
an
argument争辩/吵
11、slap
sb.
in
the
face
打了某人一计耳光
12、with
the
help
of+
with
one’s
help在某人的帮助下
13、keep
on
doing
sth.
继续做某事
14、take
a
bath

洗澡
15、get
stuck
in
陷入……

16、can’t
help
doing
sth.情不自禁地做某事
17、erase…from…
从……当中抹/擦掉
18、be
good
at
hiding
善于隐身
19、save
one’s
life救了某人的命
20、catch
up
with追上，赶上
二、重点句型
1.
It
is
a
pity
that
he
died
when
he
was
very
young.
遗憾的是,
他英年早逝.
2.
What
(do
you
think)
are
the
most
important
things
I
need
to
know
about
paintings?
你认为,关于绘画,
我需要知道的最重要的事情是什么?
3.
Well,
that
depends
on
what
kind
of
paintings
you
want
to
learn.
4.
Then
you
can
decide
whether
you
want
to
become
a
painter
or
not.(宾语从句)
那时你就能决定是否想成为一名画家.
5.
It
says
here
that
Gu
Kaizhi
is
quite
good
at
painting
figures.(
宾语从句)
这儿写着顾恺之尤其擅长画人物画.
6.
The
way
he
shows
things
in
the
distance
is
different
from
the
way
Gu
Kaizhi
does.(定语从句)
他描绘远景的方式与顾恺之不同.
7.
Perhaps
that
is
the
reason
why
I
prefer
to
paint
landscapes.(定语从句)
也许那就是我为什么更喜欢画风景画的原因.
8.
…,
it
was
Sandy
and
Pigsy
who
helped
the
Monkey
King
win
every
battle.(定语从句)
沙僧和猪八戒帮助美猴王赢得每一次战役的胜利.
9.
One
tree
can’t
make
a
forest.
独木不成林.
10.
But
without
saying
anything,
he
wrote
in
the
sand.
但什么也没说,他写在了沙子中.三、重点知识点
1.
paint
与draw
都具有
“绘画”的含义,但有很大区别
paint
表示用颜料等画带有色彩的画,
如油画、水彩画及画正式的肖像画。
draw
表用蜡笔、铅笔、钢笔等各种笔画，并且通常画得比较简单。
eg:
He
is
drawing
a
horse
on
the
blackboard.他正在黑板上画一匹马。
The
artist
painted
in
water
colors.那个画家用水彩作画。
2.
I
want
to
know
if
it
is
difficult
to
be
an
artist.=
I
wonder
if
it
is
difficult
to
be
an
artist.
我想知道成为艺术家是否很难。
If
you
work
hard
at
painting,
it
won’t
be
difficult
for
to
succeed.
如果你努力画画，对你来说成功并不难。
前句中的if表
“是否”，引导宾语从句；
后句中的if表
“如果”，引导条件状语从句。
3.
The
shorter
boy
got
stuck
in
the
mud
and
started
to
sink…小个子男孩陷进泥里，开始下沉……
get
stuck
是系表结构,
stuck是过去分词作表语,
表被动.
4.
However,
when
someone
does
something
good
for
you,
you
should
carve
it
on
a
stone
from
which
the
wind
can
never
erase
it.(定语从句).
然而,
当有人做了对你有益的事情,
你应当把它刻在石头上,
这样决不会被风抹掉.
erase…from…..
“把……从……清除/
抹掉”,此句中的定语从句的关系代词在介词之后,只能用which不能用
that.
eg:
What
can
we
learn
about
by
reading
books
in
which
heroes
fight
against
their
enemies?
通过看那些书中;英雄人物对抗敌人的书本,我们能了解到什么呢?Topic
3
I
will
remember
our
friendship
forever.一、重点短语
1、graduate
from…从…….毕业
2、a
graduation
ceremony
毕业典礼
3、prepare
for为……做准备
4、first
of
all
首先（强调事物排列顺序和时间先后）
5、at
first
起初，最先（指事情的开始与后来的发展有差异）
6、above
all首先（强调事物的重要性）
7、pass
the
final
examination
通过毕业考
8、think
back
on/
to…回想起;追忆
9、have
a
class
get-together
开同学聚会
10、with
pleasure
很乐意
11、send
photos
to
each
other互赠相片
12、dozens
of…
几十……
13、as
the
saying
goes
常言道
14、a
large
package
of…一大袋子……
15、beg
your
pardon请求你的原谅
16、go
camping
去野营
17、last
forever
永远持续
18、have
many
unforgettable
memories
of…拥有许多…….的难忘的记忆
19、get
along
well
with…与……相处融洽
20、to
one’s
joy
令某人高兴的是
21、chat
with
sb.
与某人聊天
22、take
photos
with
sb.与某人合影
23、come
to
an
end
结束
24、continue
to
do
sth.
继续做某事
25、hurry
up
赶快
26、any
time
now
随时;马上
27、head
back
home
动身回家;朝回家的路走

28、have
a
great
future
拥有美好的未来
29、give
a
big
hug
to
sb.
与某人紧紧地拥抱
30、have
a
safe
flight
旅途平安
31、keep
our
dreams
alive
让我们的梦想常在

32、bring
about带来，引起，导致二、重点句型
1.
How
time
flies!
光阴似箭！
2.
It’s
a
piece
of
cake.
小菜一碟。（这是很容易做的事）
3.
We
have
worked
so
hard
that
we
will
be
able
to
pass
it
easily.我们如此努力地学习，以致于我们能轻易地通过。
4.
I
will
say
I
have
learned
not
only
how
to
study,
but
also
how
to
be
a
man.
我要说的是我不仅学会了如何学习，而且学会了如何做人。
5.
Where
there
is
a
will
,
there
is
a
way.
有志者事竟成。
6.
Although
they
are
cheap,
they
are
valuable
to
remember
our
friendship.
尽管它们很便宜，但它们具有记住我们友谊的价值。
7.
As
the
saying
goes,
It’s
the
thought
that
counts.
常言道，礼轻情义重。
8.
I
just
want
to
beg
your
pardon.
我只想请求你的原谅。
9.
You
don’t
need
to
say
sorry
for
anything.你不需要为一些事说抱歉。
10.
Here
she
comes!
她来了。三、重点知识点
1.
This
weekend
we’ll
graduate
from
Ren’ai
International
School!本周末我们将从仁爱国际学校毕业。
1）
graduate
作动词是，表
“毕业”，相当于leave
school，其名词形式为graduation
eg:
He
graduated
in
1999.
=
He
left
school
in
1999.
2）
graduate
from
+
学校表
“从某个学校毕业”

graduate
in
+
专业

表
“毕业于某专业”
eg:
He
graduated
from
Peking
University
last
year.
去年他从北京大学毕业。
He
graduated
in
English
at
a
famous
University.他毕业于一所名牌大学的外语专业。
3)
作名词时，表“毕业生”
eg:
He
is
a
history
gradute.
他是历史系的毕业生。Each
graduate
will
receive
a
piece
of
paper
called
a
diploma.每个毕业生将会收到一张毕业证书。
2.
Thinking
back
on
these
three
years,
I
learned
if
I
want
to
succeed,
I
must
study
hard
first.
回想起过去的三年，我领悟到要想取得成功，首先必须努力学习。
think
back
on/
to
“回想起，追忆”如：When
I
think
back
on/to
those
things,
I
miss
my
friends
a
lot.
当我回想起那些事情时，我就非常想念我的朋友。
3.
…and
write
some
words
on
the
blackboard
with
color
chalks.用彩色粉笔在黑板上写几句话。
1）chalk
“粉笔”，不可数名词，若表示“一支粉笔”时，则用a
piece
of
chalk;
而不用a
chalk.
2）当表示各种颜色的粉笔时，则可数。
4.
I’ve
got
dozens
of
cards.
我准备了许多贺卡。
1）
dozen作可数名词，意为“（一）打；十二；几十；许多”Give
me
a
dozen,
please.
请给我一打。
2）
当和数词连用后面跟名词时，dozen不加s，其后也不跟of
。
eg:
two
dozen
eggs两打鸡蛋
three
dozen
apples
三打苹果
3）
dozen后加s时，常与of连用，意为“几十；许多”，表不明确的数目。
dozens
of…
几十hundreds
of…几百；成百上千thousands
of…几千；成千上万
5.
What
I
will
remember
are
all
the
good
times
we’ve
spent
together.我所记得的只是我们共同度过的美好时光。
time
表示
“（好/倒霉/艰难的）时光；时日；岁月”或“次数”时，可数。
表时间时，不可数。如：
We
had
a
good
time
yesterday.
昨天我们玩得很愉快。
It’s
best
to
forget
the
bad
times
and
just
remember
the
good
ones.
最好忘掉不愉快的岁月，只记住美好的日子。
You
should
make
good
use
of
your
time.你们要好好利用时间。
6.
to
one’s
joy

使某人高兴的是
to
one’s
surprised
使某人惊讶的是
eg:
To
my
joy,
I
became
the
owner
of
an
MP3
last
week.使我高兴的是，上周我拥有了自己的MP3。
To
our
surprised,
Jim
didn’t
pass
the
exam.
令我们惊讶的是，吉姆没通过考试。
7.
take
photos
of
sb.
为某人拍照

take
photos
with
sb.
与某人合影
8.
It
means
change,
and
leaving
behind
unforgettable
faces
and
places.
9.
它意味着变化，意味着把那些不能忘却的面容和地方留在记忆深处。
leave…behind
“忘了带；遗忘；把……抛在后面”
I
think
I
left
my
glasses
(behind)
at
home.
我想我把我的眼镜忘在家里了。
She
knew
that
she
had
left
childhood
behind.
她知道童年已一去不复返了。
10.
I’m
sad
to
be
here
watching
you
all
head
back
home.
在这里看着你们动身回家，我真有点伤心。
head
作动词，表
朝（某方向）行进

head
back
home
朝回家的路行进
head
for…朝……行进
eg:
She
headed
for
the
door.

她朝着门口走去.
重点语法：定语从句，复习并列连词及各从句

仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳 本文关键词：仁爱，知识点，归纳，九年级，初中英语

仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳　　来源：网络整理

　　免责声明：本文仅限学习分享，如产生版权问题，请联系我们及时删除。


《仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳》
由：76范文网互联网用户整理提供,链接地址：
http://m.yuan0.cn/a/98475.html
免责声明：本文仅限学习分享，如产生版权问题，请联系我们及时删除。

相关文章

最近更新/ NEWS
推荐专题/ NEWS
仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳模板 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳怎么写 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳如何写 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳格式 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳范例参考 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳开头 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳开头语 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳范文 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳范例 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳格式大全 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳_仁爱，知识点，归纳，九年级，初中英语仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳大全 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳格式模板 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳免费模板 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳免费格式 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳格式如何写 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳开头如何写 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳免费范文 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳免费范例 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳免费参考 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳模板下载 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳免费下载 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳模板怎么写 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳格式怎么写 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳开头怎么写 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳开头语怎么写 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳模板如何写 仁爱初中英语七、八、九年级所有知识点归纳开头语如何写